FCC ID: B94HNHWWR WWAN Module Card

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. The product described in this manual may include copyrighted software of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd and possible licensors. Customers shall not in any manner reproduce, distribute, modify, decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, reverse engineer, lease, assign, or sublicense the said software, unless such restrictions are prohibited by applicable laws or such actions are approved by respective copyright holders under licenses. Trademarks and Permissions

, and Technologies Co., Ltd. Other trademarks, product, service and company names mentioned are the property of their respective owners. are trademarks or registered trademarks of Huawei Notice Some features of the product and its accessories described herein rely on the software installed, capacities and settings of local network, and may not be activated or may be limited by local network operators or network service providers, thus the descriptions herein may not exactly match the product or its accessories you purchase. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd reserves the right to change or modify any information or specifications contained in this manual without prior notice or obligation. NO WARRANTY THE CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL ARE PROVIDED AS IS. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAWS, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO CASE SHALL HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS, REVENUE, DATA, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. Import and Export Regulations Customers shall comply with all applicable export or import laws and regulations and will obtain all necessary governmental permits and licenses in order to export, re-export or import the product mentioned in this manual including the software and technical data therein. Warnings and Precautions This section contains important information pertaining to the operating instructions of your device. It also contains information about how to use your device safely. Read this information carefully before using the device. Electronic Device Do not use your device if using the device is prohibited. Do not use the device when using the device causes danger or interference with electronic devices. Medical Device Follow rules and regulations set forth by hospitals and health care facilities. Do not use your device when using the device is prohibited. Some wireless devices may affect the performance of hearing aids or pacemakers. For any such problems, consult your service provider. If you are using an electronic medical device, consult the doctor or the device manufacturer to confirm whether radio waves affect the operation of this device. Potentially Explosive Atmosphere Do not use your device in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and comply with all signs and instructions. Areas that may have potentially explosive atmospheres include the areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Triggering of sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or a fire, resulting in bodily injuries or even deaths. Do not use your device at refueling points such as service stations. Comply with restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, and chemical plants. In addition, adhere to restrictions in areas where blasting operations are in progress. Before using the device, watch out for areas that have potentially explosive atmospheres that are often, but not always, clearly marked. Such locations include areas below the deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Ask the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) whether this device can be safely used in their vicinity. Traffic Security Observe local laws and regulations while using the device. To prevent accidents, do not use your wireless device while driving. RF signals may affect electronic systems of motor vehicles. For more information, consult the vehicle manufacturer. In a motor vehicle, do not place the device over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Otherwise, the device may hurt you owing to the strong force when the air bag inflates. Do not use your device while flying in an aircraft and before boarding an aircraft. Using wireless devices in an aircraft may cause danger to the operation of the aircraft and disrupt the wireless telephone network. It may also be considered illegal. Operating Environment Do not use the device in dusty, damp, and dirty places or places with magnetic fields. Otherwise, it may result in malfunction of the circuit. On a stormy day with thunder, do not use your device when it is being charged, to prevent any danger caused by lightning. While using the device, observe the local laws and regulations, and respect others' privacy and legal rights. The device should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Safety of Children Comply with all precautions with regard to children's safety. Letting the child play with your device or its accessories, which may include parts that can be detached from the device, may be dangerous, as it may present a choking hazard. Ensure that small children are kept away from the device and accessories. Accessories Use the accessories delivered only by the manufacturer. Using accessories of other manufacturers or vendors with this device model may invalidate any approval or warranty applicable to the device, result in the non-operation of the device, and cause danger. Cleaning and Maintenance It is normal that your wireless device gets hot when you use or charge it. Before you clean or maintain the wireless device, stop all applications and disconnect the wireless device from your PC. Use your wireless device and accessories with care and in a clean environment. Keep the wireless device away from a fire or a lit cigarette. Protect your wireless device and accessories from water and vapor, and keep them dry. Do not drop, throw, or bend your wireless device. Clean your wireless device with a piece of damp and soft antistatic cloth. Do not use any chemical detergent, powder, or other chemical agents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the device. Keep the ambient temperature between -10 to +55 for using the device. FCC Statement

* This device should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the device and your body. 15.19 NOTICE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 15.21 NOTICE:

Changes or modifications made to this device not expressly approved by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. may void the FCC authorization to operate this device. 15.105 NOTE:

This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by connecting or disconnecting the device to a PC, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by adopting one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the distance between the device and the receiver. Connect the device to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. This device is intended for OEM integrators only. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: B94HNHWWR ", FCC ID displayed on label. Disposal and Recycling Information This symbol (or without a solid bar) on the device, and/or on its packaging, and on its batteries where included, indicates that the device including its electrical accessories (e.g. headset, adapter, cable) and the batteries should not be disposed of as normal household garbage. These items should not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and should be handed over to a certified collection point for recycling or proper disposal at the end of their life. For more detailed information about the recycling of the device or batteries, please contact your local city office, the household waste disposal service, or the retail store where you purchased it/them. Disposal of the device and batteries if included is subject to WEEE Directive Recast

(Directive 2012/19/EU) and Battery Directive (Directive 2006/66/EC). The purpose for separating WEEE and batteries from other waste is to minimize the potential environmental impacts on human health of any hazardous substances that may be present. Reduction of Hazardous Substances This device is compliant with the REACH Regulation [Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006] and RoHS Directive Recast (Directive 2011/65/EU). Batteries where included are compliant with Battery Directive (Directive 2006/66/EC). For more information about the REACH and RoHS compliance of the device, please visit the Web site www.huaweidevice.com/certification. You are recommended to visit the Web site regularly for up-to-date information. EU Regulatory Conformance

: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. , 1999/5/EC. esky: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., tmto prohlauje, e toto zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi souvisejcmi opatenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. erkl rer hermed at denne enhed er i overensstemmelse med de obligatoriske krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Nederlands: Hierbij verklaart Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. dat dit apparaat in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. English: Hereby, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Eesti: Kesolevaga kinnitab Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., et see seade vastab Direktiivi 1999/5/E phinudmistele ja teistele asjakohastele mrustele. Suomi: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vakuuttaa tten, ett tm laite on yhdenmukainen direktiivin 1999/5/EY olennaisten vaatimusten ja direktiivin muiden asiaankuuluvien lausumien kanssa. Franais (Europen) : Le fabricant dclare que ce produit est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Deutsch: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. erklrt hiermit, dass dieses Produkt die erforderlichen Bestimmungen und andere relevante Verordnungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG einhlt.

: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1999/5/.. Magyar: Jelen nyilatkozaton keresztl a Huawei technologies Co., Ltd. kijelenti, hogy a kszlk megfelel az EC/5/1999 Irnyelv sszes lnyeges kvetelmnynek s vonatkoz elrsnak. Gaeilge: Fograonn Huawei Tchnologies Co., Ltd leis seo go bhfuil an fheiste seo i gcomhlonadh leis na for-riachtanais agus na forlacha eile maidir le Treoir 1999/5/AE. Italiano: Col presente documento, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. dichiara che questo dispositivo conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre disposizioni applicabili della Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski: Ar o Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. pazio, ka ierce atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EC pamatprasbm un piemrojamajiem nosacjumiem. Lietuvikai: iuo Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. pranea, kad is taisas atitinka Direktyvos 1999/5/EC pagrindinius reikalavimus ir taikomas slygas. Malti: Hawnhekk, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. tiddikjara li dan it-tagmir hu konformi mal-tiijiet essenzjali u provvedimenti rilevanti orajn ta Direttiva 1999/5/KE. Polski: Wymieniona w tym dokumencie firma Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. deklaruje, e niniejsze urzdzenie spenia zasadnicze wymagania w zakresie zgodnoci oraz inne odnone postanowienia Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Portugus (Europeu) : Deste modo, a Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. declara que este dispositivo est em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provises relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Romn: Prin prezenta Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. declar c acest dispozitiv este conform cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale directivei 1999/5/CE. Slovenina: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenie je v slade so zkladnmi poiadavkami a inmi relevantnmi predpismi Smernice 1999/5/ES. Slovenina: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. izjavlja, da je ta naprava v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in drugimi ustreznimi dolobami Direktive 1999/5/ES. Espaol (Europeo) : Con el presente documento, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. declara que este dispositivo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y con las dems disposiciones correspondientes de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Svenska: Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. frklarar hrmed att denna produkt verensstmmer med de grundlggande kraven och andra relevanta freskrifter i direktiv 1999/5/EG. For the declaration of conformity, visit the Web site www.huaweidevice.com/certification. Notice: Observe the national local regulations in the location where the device is to be used. This device may be restricted for use in some or all countries of European Union. Version: V100R001_01 Part Number: 31XXXXXX

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. The product described in this manual may include copyrighted software of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd and possible licensors. Customers shall not in any manner reproduce, distribute, modify, decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, reverse engineer, lease, assign, or sublicense the said software, unless such restrictions are prohibited by applicable laws or such actions are approved by respective copyright holders under licenses. Trademarks and Permissions

, are trademarks or registered trademarks of Huawei

, and Technologies Co., Ltd. Other trademarks, product, service and company names mentioned are the property of their respective owners. Notice Some features of the product and its accessories described herein rely on the software installed, capacities and settings of local network, and may not be activated or may be limited by local network operators or network service providers, thus the descriptions herein may not exactly match the product or its accessories you purchase. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd reserves the right to change or modify any information or specifications contained in this manual without prior notice or obligation. NO WARRANTY THE CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL ARE PROVIDED AS IS. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAWS, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO CASE SHALL HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS, REVENUE, DATA, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. Import and Export Regulations Customers shall comply with all applicable export or import laws and regulations and will obtain all necessary governmental permits and licenses in order to export, re-export or import the product mentioned in this manual including the software and technical data therein. Contents Getting to Know the MU736 ................................................................................................................................ 1 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3 i Thank you for purchasing HUAWEI MU736 HSPA+ M.2 Module (hereinafter referred to as the MU736) Note:

This manual briefly describes the preparation, the process for PCB Design, Assembly and safety precautions. It is recommended to read the manual before using the MU736. Getting to Know the MU736 The MU736 module is 75 pin Gold Finger with a dimension of 42 mm 30 mm 2.3mm. It is applied to the user interface board, and can be used as a wireless terminal in a network environment.

1 2 Assembly Through the M.2 connector 3

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: August 2011 First Edition: February 2011 Document Part Number: 653267-003 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 9 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 iii U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 13 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 17 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 17 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 18 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 18 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 18 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 19 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 19 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 19 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 20 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 20 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 20 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 21 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 21 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 24 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 24 Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances ................................................................................... 24 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 24 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 25 iv 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. European Union Regulatory notices 5 The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Modem notices 15 c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 17 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Headset and earphone volume level notice 19 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chemical substances 21 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Japan material content declaration 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Index A airline travel notice 9 B battery notice 10, 18, 24 battery recycling 20 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 19 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 21 D DC plug of external HP power supply notice 17 Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 24 battery, user replacement 10 equipment 20 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 20 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 20 equipment disposal notice 20 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 19 J Japan material content declaration 23 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 19 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice Mexico Sustainable Energy Use 17 Law 24 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 notices airline travel 9 battery 10, 24 battery, user replacement 18 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 DC plug of external HP power supply 17 environmental 20 equipment disposal 20 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 19 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 19 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 17 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 24 power cords 16, 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel 19 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 24 N New Zealand modem statement 15 P power cord notice 16, 19 Index 25 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 20 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 19 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 9 19 U U.S. modem statement 12 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 24 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 19 W wireless LAN devices 3 26 Index

TEMPLATE: HPSP_SLCN_CLR_Win8.1_Update 032814.indd FLAT: 340.2 mm x 342.9 mm (13.3937 x 13.5) FOLDED: 340.2 mm x 57.15 mm (13.3937 x 2.25) COLOR: 5 Color, CMYK + PMS 2925 C FOLD: Accordion Setup Instructions Quick Setup Quick Tour NOTE: Your computer has a factory-sealed battery. Before you press the power button to turn on the computer for the rst time, make sure that the AC adapter is connected to the computer.





NOTE: Your AC adapter may look slightly di erent. 1 2













Internal microphones (2)

 WWAN antennas (2)

 WLAN antennas (2)

 Mute key/Mute light

 Airplane mode key

 Speakers (2)

 Touchpad

 Windows key (displays the Start screen) Power key/Power light Webcam Webcam light















  





Power light Audio-in (microphone) /

Audio-out (headphone) jack

 USB 2.0 port

 USB 3.0 port

 HDMI port

 Security cable slot

 Power connector

 AC adapter light

 SIM Card slot*

 Memory card reader Depending on your computer model, the computer initially displays the Windows desktop or the Windows Start screen. Your computer is protected by a free subscription to McAfee LiveSafe service for a limited time from the rst time you use the computer. You will have the option to purchase McAfee LiveSafe service upon expiration of the subscription. McAfee LiveSafe service helps protect your identity, your data, and your devices with a single subscription.*

NOTE: Computer color, features, and accessories may vary.

* Select models only.

* Select models only. Regulatory Model Number The Regulatory Model Number (RMN) is TPN-Q154. The RMN is located on the bottom of the computer. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement

(EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Limited Warranty You can nd the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For some countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

Europe, Middle East, Africa:

Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9 20063 Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy North America:

Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd. Boise, ID 83714, USA When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Asia Paci c:

Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200 Alexandra Post O ice, Singapore 911507 Display the Start menu Desktop Using a TouchPad or keyboard and mouse, right-click the

. Start button On select models, using a touch screen, press and release the Start button

. Start screen Using a TouchPad or keyboard and mouse, point to the lower-

left corner of the screen to display the Start button then right-click the button. On select models, using a touch screen, tap the Desktop app, and then press and release the Start button

, and

. Go wireless Desktop Using a TouchPad or keyboard and mouse, click the network icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then connect to a network. From the Start screen, type wireless, and then select Connect to a network. Start screen NOTE: To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need a broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (purchased separately), high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider, and a wireless router

(purchased separately). Locate system information Depending on your computer model, a service label is either a ixed to the bottom of the computer or is located inside the battery bay or beneath the service door. In Windows, brie y press the fn+esc key combination to display the System Information screen. Enjoy your own personal help desk*

Get immediate answers to your computer questions with HP SmartFriend Services. For more information, go to http://www.hpremoteservices.com. Find more information Windows models Linux models FreeDOS models app on the Start screen. To learn about Windows, select the Getting Started with Windows 8 To access Help and Support from the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. To access the user guides, select the HP Support Assistant app on the Start screen, select My computer, and then select User guides. Double-click the HP Documents icon on the desktop. On the Boot Menu, select HP Documents. NOTE: A User Guides disc is included with some models.

* Select models only. Replace this box with PI statement as per spec. 787341-001 TEMPLATE: HPSP_SLCN_CLR_Win8.1_Update 032814.indd FLAT: 340.2 mm x 342.9 mm (13.3937 x 13.5) FOLDED: 340.2 mm x 57.15 mm (13.3937 x 2.25) COLOR: 5 Color, CMYK + PMS 2925 C FOLD: Accordion Navigating the Windows Start Screen The Windows Start screen provides a central location where you can access your information and email, browse the Web, stream videos, view photos, and access your social media websites. Depending on your computer model, you can use a keyboard and mouse, a TouchPad, or a touch screen to navigate the Start screen. In the instructions below, the keyboard and mouse icon touch gesture icon instructions. are used to indicate the corresponding and the







Using a keyboard and mouse Using touch gestures

Open an app Click a Start screen app. To quickly return to the Start screen, press the Windows key on your keyboard.

 Display the charms (Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings) Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen.

 Find a list of all the apps on your computer Point to the lower-left area of the Start screen, and then click the arrow

.

 Display the Start menu Point to the lower-left corner of the Start screen to display the Start button

, and then right-click the Start button.

 Switch between open apps Point to the upper-left corner of the Start screen to reveal a list of open apps, and then click an open app. TIP: To quickly return to the Start screen, press the Windows key keyboard. on your

Open an app Tap a Start screen app. To quickly return to the Start screen, tap the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen.

 Display the charms (Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings) Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen.

 Find a list of all the apps on your computer Swipe to the left on the TouchPad or touch screen until the arrow appears, and then tap the arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start screen.

 Display the Start menu Using a touch screen, tap the Desktop app, and then press and release the Start button

. Using a TouchPad, point to the lower-left corner of the Start screen to display the Start button

, and then right-click the button.

 Switch between open apps Swipe in and out from the left edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to reveal a list of open apps, and then tap an open app. Search for an app, setting, or le 1. From the Start screen, begin typing the name of an app, setting, or le. 2. Select the app, setting, or le from the list that is displayed on the screen. TIP: You can also search by selecting the Search icon the Start screen. in the upper-right corner of



Shut down your computer From the Start screen, select the Power icon of the screen, and then select Shut down.

- or -

Display the Start menu, and then select Shut down or sign out. in the upper-right corner Return to the Start screen Press the Windows key the lower-left corner of the screen. on your keyboard, or tap the Start button in Documentation feedback HP is committed to providing documentation that meets your needs. To help us improve the documentation, please send any suggestions, comments, or errors to doc.feedback@hp.com. Include the document title and part number (located near the barcode) when submitting your feedback. Touch gestures for TouchPad or touch screen Use touch gestures with the TouchPad and, on select computer models, with a touch screen. Tap/Double-tap to select Top-edge swipe to display app command options Right-edge swipe to display the charms Left-edge swipe to switch between open apps Two- nger click

(same as right-clicking with a mouse) Two- nger pinch zoom NOTE: Some computers, apps, and les do not support all touch gestures. Two- nger scroll

(TouchPad only) One- nger slide

(touch screen only) WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices provided with your user guides. To locate the user guides for your computer, see the Find more information section of this poster. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide provided with your user guides. It describes proper workstation setup, and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. WARNING: To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, at surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block air ow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits de ned by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1 and its latest version or amendment). Product description This product is a lightweight notebook computer and features a thin-panel display, TouchPad, processor, keyboard, RAM, integrated battery pack, hard drive or solid state drive, and an external AC adapter. The printed Setup Instructions identify the hardware components of your computer. Depending on your computer model, the AC adapter has a rating of 100240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A, 3.3 A, or 4.6 A. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. McAfee LiveSafe is a trademark of McAfee, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of the Microsoft group of companies. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com for details. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: October 2014

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: October 2014 First Edition: June 2014 Document Part Number: 786097-002 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers .................................................................................................... 1 Accessing regulatory labels .................................................................................................................................. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 2 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................. 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................ 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ...................................................................... 5 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ....................................................... 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................ 5 Germany (English text) ................................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .............................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................. 6 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ............................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................................. 9 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 10 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 11 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Power cord notice ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 13 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................................... 13 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................................... 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ........................................................ 14 Modem notices .................................................................................................................................................... 14 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 14 Canadian modem statements ........................................................................................................... 15 Japanese modem statements .......................................................................................................... 15 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 16 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ............................................................................................................... 16 Federal Communications Commission notice .................................................................................. 17 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 17 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 17 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................................................................................................................................ 17 Products with wireless LAN devices ............................................................................... 17 Australia telecom statement ............................................................................................................ 18 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................................. 19 European Union regulatory notices .................................................................................................. 19 Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................. 19 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ................................................. 19 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ................................... 20 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ............................ 20 Ergonomics notice ........................................................................................ 20 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................................... 20 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings ...................................................... 20 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................................... 20 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Taiwan NCC notices ........................................................................................................................... 21 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ........................................................................................ 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ......................... 22 vi 3 Safety notices for notebook computers ......................................................................................................... 23 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 23 Potential safety conditions notice ...................................................................................................................... 23 User-replaceable battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 24 Power cord notices .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 24 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 25 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 25 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 25 Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................................... 26 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 26 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................................ 27 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 27 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 28 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 28 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................................. 28 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 28 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 28 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 28 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 28 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 28 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 28 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 29 Power cord set requirements ........................................................................................................... 29 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 29 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 29 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 30 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 30 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 30 Note to CATV system installer .......................................................................................................... 30 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 31 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 31 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 31 Germany acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................... 32 vii Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 32 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ............................................................................................ 33 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 33 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 33 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 33 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 34 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 34 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 35 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 35 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 38 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 41 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 41 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................................... 41 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 41 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ......................................................................................... 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ........................................................................................... 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ................................................... 42 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 42 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 42 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 42 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 43 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 43 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 44 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 44 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 44 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 44 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 45 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 48 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content .................................................. 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 50 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 50 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 50 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) .... 50 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 51

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances

(RoHS)) ................................................................................................................................................................. 51 TCO Certified Edge Certification .......................................................................................................................... 51 viii Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 53 ix x 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select models only), under the removable service door (select models only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) for radio modules in your computer. Electronic labels can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Accessing regulatory labels 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Brazil notice 3 Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions, but a minimum distance of 1 cm should be maintained from the antennas. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. European Union regulatory notices 5 Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Japan notice Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( )

(B) ,

.

(

).

, 2.5cm

. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of Laser compliance 9 that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 14 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

Modem notices 15 New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 17 WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 This product may incorporate a radio transmitting and receiving device. For desktop computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( ) 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations

(B) ,

.

(

). 20cm . This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and personnel. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Heat-related safety warning notice 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 China safety notices 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. 26 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. Battery replacement notice 27 Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-Packard authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/

index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. Pinch hazard 29 TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. China safety notices 31 Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address:

http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 33 Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 34 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 35 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 China PC energy label 37 GB28380-2012 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X X Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 39

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O: GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

:

40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. Brazil hardware recycling information 43 Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This statement applies to All-in-One computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

China PC energy label 45 Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 46 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 47 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content I/O PCAs

/

/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin

(componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS))

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. TCO Certified Edge Certification This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. Turkey EEE regulation 51 52 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Index A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 25, 31 B battery notice 8, 23, 41 battery recycling 33 Brazil notice 3 C cable grounding notice 25 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 4 China environmental notices 35, 44 China PC energy label 35, 45 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 38, 48 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 3 disposal notices battery 41 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 33 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 33 ENERGY STAR certification 34, 43 environmental notices 33 equipment disposal notice 33 ergonomics notice 5, 20 European Union notices 4, 19 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 17 notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications notebook computers notice 2 Commission 2 G GS Notice 5, 20 H headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 K keyboard notice 24 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 41 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 10 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 N New Zealand modem statement 12 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 41 battery, user replacement 23 Brazil 3 Canada 4 China restriction of hazardous substances 38, 48 environmental 33 equipment disposal 33 ergonomics 5, 20 European Union 4, 19 headset and earphone volume level 24 India restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 Japan 6 Japan power cord 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 keyboard 24 laser safety 9 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 41 power cords 13, 24 Singapore 7 South Korea 6 Taiwan 7, 21 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel 24 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 41, 51 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 Index 53 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 13, 24 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 33 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 6 T Taiwan notice 7, 21 TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel notice 24 tropical warning notice 25, 31 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 10 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 51 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 24 W wireless LAN devices 3, 18, 19 54 Index

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: October 2014 First Edition: June 2014 Document Part Number: 786097-002 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers .................................................................................................... 1 Accessing regulatory labels .................................................................................................................................. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 2 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................. 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................ 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ...................................................................... 5 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ....................................................... 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................ 5 Germany (English text) ................................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .............................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................. 6 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ............................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................................. 9 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 10 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 11 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Power cord notice ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 13 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................................... 13 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................................... 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ........................................................ 14 Modem notices .................................................................................................................................................... 14 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 14 Canadian modem statements ........................................................................................................... 15 Japanese modem statements .......................................................................................................... 15 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 16 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ............................................................................................................... 16 Federal Communications Commission notice .................................................................................. 17 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 17 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 17 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................................................................................................................................ 17 Products with wireless LAN devices ............................................................................... 17 Australia telecom statement ............................................................................................................ 18 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................................. 19 European Union regulatory notices .................................................................................................. 19 Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................. 19 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ................................................. 19 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ................................... 20 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ............................ 20 Ergonomics notice ........................................................................................ 20 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................................... 20 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings ...................................................... 20 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................................... 20 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Taiwan NCC notices ........................................................................................................................... 21 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ........................................................................................ 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ......................... 22 vi 3 Safety notices for notebook computers ......................................................................................................... 23 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 23 Potential safety conditions notice ...................................................................................................................... 23 User-replaceable battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 24 Power cord notices .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 24 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 25 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 25 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 25 Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................................... 26 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 26 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................................ 27 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 27 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 28 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 28 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................................. 28 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 28 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 28 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 28 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 28 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 28 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 28 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 29 Power cord set requirements ........................................................................................................... 29 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 29 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 29 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 30 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 30 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 30 Note to CATV system installer .......................................................................................................... 30 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 31 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 31 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 31 Germany acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................... 32 vii Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 32 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ............................................................................................ 33 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 33 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 33 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 33 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 34 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 34 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 35 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 35 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 38 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 41 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 41 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................................... 41 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 41 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ......................................................................................... 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ........................................................................................... 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ................................................... 42 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 42 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 42 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 42 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 43 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 43 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 44 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 44 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 44 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 44 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 45 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 48 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content .................................................. 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 50 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 50 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 50 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) .... 50 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 51

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances

(RoHS)) ................................................................................................................................................................. 51 TCO Certified Edge Certification .......................................................................................................................... 51 viii Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 53 ix x 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select models only), under the removable service door (select models only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) for radio modules in your computer. Electronic labels can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Accessing regulatory labels 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Brazil notice 3 Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions, but a minimum distance of 1 cm should be maintained from the antennas. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. European Union regulatory notices 5 Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Japan notice Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( )

(B) ,

.

(

).

, 2.5cm

. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of Laser compliance 9 that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 14 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

Modem notices 15 New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 17 WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 This product may incorporate a radio transmitting and receiving device. For desktop computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( ) 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations

(B) ,

.

(

). 20cm . This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and personnel. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Heat-related safety warning notice 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 China safety notices 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. 26 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. Battery replacement notice 27 Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-Packard authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/

index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. Pinch hazard 29 TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. China safety notices 31 Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address:

http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 33 Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 34 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 35 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 China PC energy label 37 GB28380-2012 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X X Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 39

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O: GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

:

40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. Brazil hardware recycling information 43 Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This statement applies to All-in-One computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

China PC energy label 45 Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 46 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 47 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content I/O PCAs

/

/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin

(componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS))

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. TCO Certified Edge Certification This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. Turkey EEE regulation 51 52 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Index A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 25, 31 B battery notice 8, 23, 41 battery recycling 33 Brazil notice 3 C cable grounding notice 25 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 4 China environmental notices 35, 44 China PC energy label 35, 45 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 38, 48 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 3 disposal notices battery 41 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 33 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 33 ENERGY STAR certification 34, 43 environmental notices 33 equipment disposal notice 33 ergonomics notice 5, 20 European Union notices 4, 19 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 17 notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications notebook computers notice 2 Commission 2 G GS Notice 5, 20 H headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 K keyboard notice 24 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 41 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 10 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 N New Zealand modem statement 12 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 41 battery, user replacement 23 Brazil 3 Canada 4 China restriction of hazardous substances 38, 48 environmental 33 equipment disposal 33 ergonomics 5, 20 European Union 4, 19 headset and earphone volume level 24 India restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 Japan 6 Japan power cord 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 keyboard 24 laser safety 9 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 41 power cords 13, 24 Singapore 7 South Korea 6 Taiwan 7, 21 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel 24 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 41, 51 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 Index 53 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 13, 24 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 33 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 6 T Taiwan notice 7, 21 TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel notice 24 tropical warning notice 25, 31 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 10 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 51 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 24 W wireless LAN devices 3, 18, 19 54 Index

User Guide Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2015 Document Part Number: 807293-001 Product notice Software terms This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware and/or a DVD drive to install the Windows 7 software and take full advantage of Windows 7 functionality. Go to http://windows.microsoft.com/en-us/

windows7/get-know-windows-7 for details. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select models only) IMPORTANT: Select computer models are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select models only) Table of contents 1 Welcome ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 4 Right ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Left ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Display ................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Top ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Top cover ............................................................................................................................................. 7 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 8 Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Buttons and speakers ....................................................................................................................... 10 Keys ................................................................................................................................................... 11 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 12 Front ..................................................................................................................................................................... 12 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 13 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 13 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 13 Turning wireless devices on or off ................................................................................. 13 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ..................................................... 14 Using the wireless button ............................................................................................... 14 Using operating system controls ................................................................................... 14 Using a WLAN ..................................................................................................................................... 14 Using an Internet service provider ................................................................................. 15 Setting up a WLAN .......................................................................................................... 15 Configuring a wireless router ......................................................................................... 15 Protecting your WLAN ..................................................................................................... 16 Connecting to a WLAN ..................................................................................................... 16 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................ 16 Inserting and removing a SIM ......................................................................................... 17 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ..................................................................................................... 18 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................................... 18 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) ........................................................................................ 19 vii 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices .............................................................. 20 Using pointing devices ......................................................................................................................................... 20 Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................. 20 Using the TouchPad and gestures .................................................................................................... 20 Turning the TouchPad off and on ................................................................................... 21 Tapping ........................................................................................................................... 21 Scrolling .......................................................................................................................... 22 2-finger pinch zoom ....................................................................................................... 22 Using the keyboard .............................................................................................................................................. 22 Identifying the hot keys .................................................................................................................... 23 Using keypads ................................................................................................................................... 24 Using the embedded numeric keypad ............................................................................ 24 Turning the embedded numeric keypad on and off .................................... 26 Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad ....................... 26 Using an optional external numeric keypad .................................................................. 26 5 Multimedia ................................................................................................................................................. 27 Using the media activity controls ........................................................................................................................ 27 Audio .................................................................................................................................................................... 27 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 27 Adjusting the volume ........................................................................................................................ 27 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 28 Connecting headphones and microphones ...................................................................................... 28 Checking audio functions on the computer ...................................................................................... 28 Webcam (select models only) ............................................................................................................................. 28 Video .................................................................................................................................................................... 29 VGA .................................................................................................................................................... 30 HDMI (select models only) ................................................................................................................ 30 Configuring audio for HDMI ............................................................................................................... 31 Intel Wireless Display (select models only) ...................................................................................... 31 6 Power management ..................................................................................................................................... 33 Shutting down the computer .............................................................................................................................. 33 Setting power options ......................................................................................................................................... 33 Using power-saving states ............................................................................................................... 33 Intel Rapid Start Technology (select models only) ........................................................ 34 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................. 34 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ................................................................................... 34 Using the power meter and power settings ................................................................... 35 Setting password protection on wakeup ....................................................................... 35 viii Using battery power .......................................................................................................................... 35 Factory-sealed battery ................................................................................................... 35 Finding additional battery information .......................................................................... 36 Using Battery Check ........................................................................................................ 36 Displaying the remaining battery charge ....................................................................... 36 Maximizing battery discharge time ................................................................................ 36 Managing low battery levels .......................................................................................... 36 Identifying low battery levels ...................................................................... 37 Resolving a low battery level ....................................................................... 37 Conserving battery power .............................................................................................. 37 Using external AC power ................................................................................................................... 37 Testing an AC adapter ..................................................................................................... 38 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .... 38 7 External cards and devices ........................................................................................................................... 40 Using memory card readers (select models only) .............................................................................................. 40 Inserting a memory card ................................................................................................................... 40 Removing a memory card ................................................................................................................. 40 Using a USB device ............................................................................................................................................... 41 Connecting a USB device ................................................................................................................... 42 Removing a USB device ..................................................................................................................... 42 Using optional external devices .......................................................................................................................... 42 Using optional external drives .......................................................................................................... 43 8 Drives ......................................................................................................................................................... 44 Handling drives .................................................................................................................................................... 44 Using hard drives ................................................................................................................................................. 44 Intel Smart Response Technology (select models only) .................................................................. 44 Improving hard drive performance ................................................................................................... 45 Using Disk Defragmenter ............................................................................................... 45 Using Disk Cleanup ......................................................................................................... 45 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) .................................................................................. 45 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 46 9 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 47 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 47 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 47 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 48 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 49 Managing a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................................... 49 ix Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 50 Managing a Computer Setup DriveLock password ........................................................................... 50 Setting a DriveLock password ........................................................................................ 51 Entering a DriveLock password ...................................................................................... 52 Changing a DriveLock password ..................................................................................... 52 Removing DriveLock protection ..................................................................................... 52 Using Computer Setup Automatic DriveLock ................................................................................... 53 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password .................................................................. 53 Removing Automatic DriveLock protection ................................................................... 53 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................................... 54 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................................... 54 Installing critical security updates ...................................................................................................................... 54 Using HP Client Security (select models only) .................................................................................................... 55 Installing an optional security cable ................................................................................................................... 55 10 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................. 56 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 56 Cleaning procedures ......................................................................................................................... 56 Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) ........................................................... 56 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 56 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ................................................................ 57 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 57 Using SoftPaq Download Manager ...................................................................................................................... 57 11 Backup and recovery .................................................................................................................................. 58 Creating recovery media and backups ................................................................................................................ 58 Guidelines .......................................................................................................................................... 58 Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator ................................................................. 58 Creating recovery media ................................................................................................. 59 Backing up your information ............................................................................................................ 59 Performing a system recovery ............................................................................................................................ 60 Using the Windows recovery tools ................................................................................................... 60 Using f11 recovery tools (select models only) ................................................................................. 61 Using Windows 7 operating system media ...................................................................................... 61 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) .................................................... 63 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 63 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 63 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 63 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 64 x Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 65 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................ 65 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 65 Using MultiBoot ................................................................................................................................................... 66 About the boot device order ............................................................................................................. 66 Choosing MultiBoot preferences ...................................................................................................... 66 Setting a new boot order in Computer Setup ................................................................. 66 Dynamically choosing a boot device using the f9 prompt ............................................. 67 Setting a MultiBoot Express prompt .............................................................................. 67 Entering MultiBoot Express preferences ....................................................................... 67 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) (select models only) ........................................................................ 68 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device .................................................. 68 13 Support ..................................................................................................................................................... 69 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 69 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 70 14 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 71 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 71 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 71 Appendix A Traveling with or shipping your computer ....................................................................................... 72 Appendix B Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 73 Troubleshooting resources ................................................................................................................................. 73 Resolving issues .................................................................................................................................................. 73 The computer is unable to start up .................................................................................................. 73 The computer screen is blank ........................................................................................................... 73 Software is functioning abnormally ................................................................................................. 74 The computer is on but not responding ........................................................................................... 74 The computer is unusually warm ..................................................................................................... 74 An external device is not working ..................................................................................................... 74 The wireless network connection is not working ............................................................................. 74 A disc does not play ........................................................................................................................... 75 A movie is not visible on an external display .................................................................................... 75 The process of burning a disc does not begin, or it stops before completion ................................. 76 Appendix C Electrostatic discharge .................................................................................................................. 77 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 78 xi xii 1 Welcome After you set up and register the computer, it is important to take the following steps:

Connect to the InternetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the Internet. For more information, see Connecting to a network on page 13. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 54. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Getting to know your computer on page 4 and Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices on page 20 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select Start > All Programs. For details about using the software included with the computer, see the software manufacturer's instructions, which may be provided with the software or on the manufacturer's website. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backup and recovery on page 58. 1 Finding information You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resources Setup Instructions poster Help and Support To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/

support, and select your country. Select Drivers &

Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Worldwide support This booklet is provided with your computer. To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. HP website To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/

support, and select your country. Select Drivers &

Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Safety & Comfort Guide To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support

> User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support

> User guides. For information about How to set up the computer Help to identify computer components Operating system information Software, driver, and BIOS updates Troubleshooting tools How to access support Online chat with an HP technician Email support Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Support information Ordering parts and finding additional help Accessories available for the device Proper workstation setup, posture, health, and work habits Electrical and mechanical safety information Regulatory and safety information Battery disposal information Limited Warranty*

Warranty information To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support >

User guides > View Warranty Information. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For some countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Welcome Resources For information about IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Finding information 3 2 Getting to know your computer Right Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) USB 3.0 port Memory card reader Each USB 3.0 port connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. For details about different types of USB ports, see NOTE:

Using a USB device on page 41. Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. RJ-45 (network) jack/lights Connects a network cable.

(4) AC adapter/Battery light Green (left): The network is connected. Amber (right): The network is showing activity. White: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 90 to 99 percent. Amber: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 0 to 90 percent. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged.

(5) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. HDMI port USB 3.0 ports (2) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Each USB 3.0 port connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. For details about different types of USB ports, see NOTE:

Using a USB device on page 41. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-

in (microphone). Left 5 Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) WLAN antennas (2)*

WWAN antennas (2)*

Webcam light Webcam Speaker Internal display switch Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWAN). On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. For information on using the webcam, select Start > All Programs >

Communication and Chat > HP WebCam. Produce sound. Turns off the display or initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The display switch is not visible on the outside of the computer.

*The antennas are not visible on the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top Top cover Component

(1) Wireless light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Top 7 TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Description NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. For more information, see Edge swipes (select models only) on page 34. Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Lights Component

(1) Power light

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light TouchPad light Mute light Wireless light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology NOTE:

feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using power-saving states on page 33. On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. On: The TouchPad is off. Off: The TouchPad is on. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Top 9 Buttons and speakers Component

(1) Power button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. If the computer has stopped responding and the previous shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for 15 seconds to perform a hardware reset turning off the computer immediately. For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology NOTE:

feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using power-saving states on page 33. To learn more about your power settings: Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options.

(2) Speakers (2) Produce sound. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key, the num lk key, the esc key, or the b key. Windows button Displays the Windows Start menu. Function keys Embedded numeric keypad Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. When the keypad is turned on, it can be used like an external numeric keypad. Each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key. Top 11 Bottom Component

(1) Vent Enable airflow to cool internal components. Description NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Front Component

(1) Hard drive light Description Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. For more information about HP 3D DriveGuard, NOTE:

see Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) on page 45. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks

(commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button, wireless switch, or wireless key (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button) Operating system controls Turning wireless devices on or off You can use the wireless button or HP Connection Manager (select models only) to turn on and turn off wireless devices. NOTE: A computer may have a wireless button, a wireless switch, or a wireless key on the keyboard. The term wireless button is used throughout this guide to refer to all types of wireless controls. To turn off wireless devices using HP Connection Manager:

Right-click the HP Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click the power button next to the desired device.

-or-

Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Connection Manager, and then click the power button next to the desired device. Connecting to a wireless network 13 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) HP Connection Manager provides a central location for managing your wireless devices, an interface for connecting to the Internet using HP Mobile Broadband, and an interface for sending and receiving SMS (text) messages. HP Connection Manager allows you to manage the following devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN)/Wi-Fi Wireless wide area network (WWAN)/HP Mobile Broadband Bluetooth HP Connection Manager provides information and notifications on connection status, power status, SIM details, and SMS messages. Status information and notifications are provided in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. To open HP Connection Manager:

Click the HP Connection Manager icon in the taskbar.

-or-

Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Connection Manager. For more information, see the HP Connection Manager software Help. Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (white) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. For more information, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. 14 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless computer to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the NOTE:

network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a firewall. A firewall checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 2. 3. 4. Click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select a WLAN to connect to. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center. NOTE:

NOTE:

and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 5. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider

(called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM. A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about inserting and removing the SIM, see the Inserting and removing a SIM on page 17 section in this chapter. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, go to http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (select regions/countries only). Inserting and removing a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Shut down the computer. Close the display. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Connecting to a wireless network 17 6. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. NOTE: The SIM in your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Reconnect external power. Reconnect external devices. Turn on the computer. 7. 8. 9. To remove a SIM, gently pull on the SIM and then remove it from the slot. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network (PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting to a wired network There are 2 kinds of wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connection. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Connecting to a wired network 19 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices Your computer allows navigation using touch gestures (select models only) in addition to the keyboard and mouse. Touch gestures can be used on your computer TouchPad or on a touch screen (select models only). Select computer models have special action key or hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. Using pointing devices NOTE:

(purchased separately) by connecting it to one of the USB ports on the computer. In addition to the pointing devices included with your computer, you can use an external USB mouse Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. You can also view demonstrations of TouchPad gestures. To access Mouse Properties:

Select Start > Devices and Printers. Then right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse settings. Using the TouchPad and gestures The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen and control the pointer by using simple finger movements. TIP: Use the left and right buttons on the TouchPad as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. 20 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices Turning the TouchPad off and on To turn the TouchPad off and on, press the f2 and fn keys at the same time. Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the Tap function on the TouchPad. Tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Using pointing devices 21 Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Using the keyboard The keyboard and mouse allow you to type select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. 22 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Identifying the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key (2) and either the esc key (1) or one of the function keys (4). To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hot key combination. Hot key combination Description fn+esc fn+f1 Displays system information. Opens Help and Support. Help and Support provides tutorials, answers to questions, and product updates. fn+f2 Activates or deactivates the Touchpad. fn+f3 Initiates Sleep, which saves your information in system memory. The display and other system components turn off and power is conserved. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. fn+f4 Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing fn+f4 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information on the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f4 hot key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information on the computer. fn+f5 Mutes or restores speaker sound. Using the keyboard 23 Hot key combination Description fn+ f6 Decreases speaker volume. fn+f7 Increases speaker volume. fn+f8 Mutes the microphone. fn+f9 Decreases the screen brightness level. fn+f10 Increases the screen brightness level. fn+f11 Turns the keyboard backlight on and off. NOTE: The keyboard backlight is turned on at the factory. To extend battery life, turn off the keyboard backlight. fn+f12 Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: This key does not establish a wireless connection. To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must be set up. Using keypads The computer includes an embedded numeric keypad, and it also supports an optional external numeric keypad, or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Using the embedded numeric keypad 24 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices Component

(1) fn key

(2) Embedded numeric keypad Description Turns the embedded numeric keypad on and off when pressed in combination with the num lk key. NOTE: The embedded numeric keypad will not function while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the computer. When the keypad is turned on, it can be used like an external numeric keypad. Each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key.

(3) Windows button Displays the Windows Start menu. Using the keyboard 25 Turning the embedded numeric keypad on and off Press fn+num lk to turn on the embedded numeric keypad. Press fn+num lk again to turn off the keypad. NOTE: The embedded numeric keypad is turned off while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the computer. Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad You can temporarily alternate the functions of keys on the embedded numeric keypad between their standard keyboard functions and their keypad functions:

To use the navigational function of a keypad key while the keypad is off, press and hold the fn key while pressing the keypad key. To use the standard function of a keypad key while the keypad is on:

Press and hold the fn key to type in lowercase. Press and hold fn+shift to type in uppercase. Using an optional external numeric keypad Keys on most external numeric keypads function differently according to whether num lock is on or off. (Num lock is turned off at the factory.)For example:

When num lock is on, most keypad keys type numbers. When num lock is off, most keypad keys function like the arrow, page up, or page down keys. When num lock on an external keypad is turned on, the num lock light on the computer is turned on. When num lock on an external keypad is turned off, the num lock light on the computer is turned off. To turn num lock on or off on an external keypad as you work:

Press the num lk key on the external keypad, not on the computer. 26 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices 5 Multimedia Your computer may include the following:

Integrated speaker(s) Integrated microphone(s) Integrated webcam Preinstalled multimedia software Multimedia buttons or keys Using the media activity controls Depending on your computer model, you may have the following media activity controls that allow you to play, pause, fast forward, or rewind a media file:

Media buttons Media hot keys (specific keys pressed in combination with the fn key) Media keys Audio On your HP computer, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port (or the audio-out jack) on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Configuring audio for HDMI on page 31. Before connecting audio devices, be sure to adjust the volume. Adjusting the volume Depending on your computer model, you can adjust the volume using the following:

Volume buttons Volume hot keys (specific keys pressed in combination with the fn key) Volume keys WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User guides. NOTE: Volume can also be controlled through the operating system and some programs. Using the media activity controls 27 NOTE: See Getting to know your computer on page 4 for information on what type of volume controls your computer has. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. Connecting headphones and microphones You can connect wired headphones or headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. Many headsets with integrated microphones are commercially available. To connect wireless headphones or headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User guides. Checking audio functions on the computer NOTE:

free of background noise. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 2. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 1. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. 2. 3. Save the file to your desktop. 4. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer:

Select Start > Control Panel > Audio. Webcam (select models only) Some computers include an integrated webcam. With the preinstalled software, you can use the webcam to take a photo or record a video. You can preview and save the photo or video recording. The webcam software enables you to experiment with the following features:

28 Chapter 5 Multimedia Capturing and sharing video Streaming video with instant message software Taking still photos Video Your HP computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer without needing to connect to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Your computer may have an high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. Your computer has the following external video ports:

VGA HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions if you have questions. NOTE: See Getting to know your computer on page 4 for information about your computer's video ports. Video 29 VGA The external monitor port, or VGA port, is an analog display interface that connects an external VGA display device such as an external VGA monitor or a VGA projector to the computer. 1. To connect a VGA display device, connect the device cable to the external monitor port. 2. Press fn+f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

PC Screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, adjust the screen resolution of NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. HDMI (select models only) The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or to any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video and/or audio signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). One HDMI device can be connected to the HDMI port on the computer. The information displayed on the computer screen can be simultaneously displayed on the HDMI device. To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 30 Chapter 5 Multimedia 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device Press fn+f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, adjust the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Configuring audio for HDMI To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your computer. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. To return audio to the computer speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. Intel Wireless Display (select models only) Intel Wireless Display allows you to share your computer content wirelessly on your TV. To experience wireless display, a wireless TV adapter (purchased separately) is required. DVDs that have output protection may not play on Intel Wireless Display. (However, DVDs that do not have output protect will play.) Blu-ray Video 31 discs, which have output protection, will not play on Intel Wireless Display. For details about using the wireless TV adapter, see the manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Be sure that wireless is enabled on your computer before using the wireless display. 32 Chapter 5 Multimedia 6 Power management NOTE: A computer may have a power button or a power switch. The term power button is used throughout this guide to mean both types of power controls. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. The shutdown command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a Universal Serial Bus

(USB) port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows shutdown command:

NOTE:

shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation before Save your work and close all open programs. Select Start > Shut Down. 1. 2. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedure, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete. Click the Power icon, and then click Shut Down. Disconnect the computer from external power. On models with a user-replaceable battery, remove the battery. If the computer has stopped responding and the previous shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for 15 seconds to perform a hardware reset turning off the computer immediately. Setting power options Using power-saving states Sleep is enabled at the factory. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external memory card. Shutting down the computer 33 NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state. Intel Rapid Start Technology (select models only) For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology (RST) feature is enabled by default. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. Rapid Start Technology manages your power-saving options as follows:

SleepRapid Start Technology allows you to select the Sleep state. To exit from Sleep, press any key, activate the TouchPad, or press the power button briefly. HibernationRapid Start Technology initiates Hibernation after a period of inactivity while in the Sleep state when running on battery power or on external power or when the battery reaches a critical level. After Hibernation is initiated, press the power button to resume your work. NOTE: Rapid Start Technology can be disabled in Setup Utility (BIOS). If you want to be able to initiate the Hibernation state, you must enable user-initiated Hibernation using Power Options. See Initiating and exiting Hibernation on page 34. Initiating and exiting Sleep With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Select Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and the computer returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before the computer will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after a period of inactivity when running on battery power or on external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation Select Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. 34 Chapter 6 Power management NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To reveal the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Using battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. The computer runs on battery power whenever it is not plugged into external AC power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, running programs, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power, the computer automatically switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected on the computer or an AC power loss occurs. NOTE: When you disconnect AC power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. Select computer models can switch between graphic modes to increase battery life. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in Help and Support. To access battery information, select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal, and Mechanical. Click the Power tab, and then click Battery Check. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. Setting power options 35 The battery(ies) in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding additional battery information Help and Support provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power Plans: Frequently Asked Questions. Using Battery Check Help and Support provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to work properly. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal, and Mechanical. Click the Power tab, and then click Battery Check. 2. 3. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge Move the pointer over the power meter icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually decreases as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Remove the battery on the computer when it is not being used or charged, if the computer contains a user-replaceable battery Store the user-replaceable battery in a cool, dry location. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. 36 Chapter 6 Power management Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select models only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The power meter icon in the notification area shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

settings on page 35. For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power If the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional docking or expansion device Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available To resolve a low battery level when no power source is available, save your work and shut down the computer. Conserving battery power Select low power-use settings through Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and LAN connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source. Stop, disable, or remove any external memory cards that you are not using. Decrease screen brightness. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep, or shut down the computer. Using external AC power WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. NOTE:

computer box. For information on connecting to AC power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the External AC power is supplied through an approved AC adapter or an optional docking or expansion device. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

Setting power options 37 When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a CD, a DVD, or a BD (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the power meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

NOTE: The following instructions apply to computers with user-replaceable batteries. Shut down the computer. Remove the battery on the computer. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. 1. 2. 3. 4. Contact support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. If a network connection is available, Smart Connect updates open apps such as your email inboxes, social network sites, and news pages and then returns the computer to the Sleep state. Smart Connect also syncs content that you have created offline, such as emails. When the computer exits Sleep, you have immediate access to your updated information. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, select Start > All Programs > Intel > Intel Smart Connect Technology. 38 Chapter 6 Power management To reveal the Intel Smart Connect Technology icon, hover over the icons in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click the icon. Setting power options 39 7 External cards and devices Using memory card readers (select models only) Optional memory cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. To determine the memory card formats that are supported on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 4. Inserting a memory card CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the memory card connectors, use minimal force to insert a memory card. 1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Removing a memory card CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the memory card. 1. 2. Save your information and close all programs associated with the memory card. Click the remove hardware icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Then follow the on-screen instructions. 40 Chapter 7 External cards and devices 3. Press in on the card (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). NOTE:

If the card does not eject, pull the card out of the slot. Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, see the manufacturer's instructions. These instructions may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers website. The computer has at least 1 USB port that supports USB 1.0, 1.1, 2.0, or 3.0 devices. Your computer may also have a USB charging port that provides power to an external device. An optional docking device or USB hub provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. Using a USB device 41 Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect the device. Connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. NOTE: The following illustration may look slightly different than your computer. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message in the notification area lets you know that the device is recognized by the computer. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. 1. 2. 3. To remove a USB device, save your information and close all programs associated with the device. Click the remove hardware icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Remove the device. Using optional external devices NOTE:

see the manufacturer's instructions. For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, To connect an external device to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 42 Chapter 7 External cards and devices Connect the device to the computer. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. 1. 2. 3. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Using optional external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. A USB drive can be added by connecting the drive to a USB port to the computer. NOTE: HP external USB optical drives should be connected to the powered USB port to the computer. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module External optical drive (CD, DVD, and Blu-ray) MultiBay device Using optional external devices 43 8 Drives Handling drives CAUTION: Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Do not drop a drive, place items on it, or expose it to liquids, or temperature or humidity extremes. Observe these precautions when handling drives:

Before removing or installing a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching a grounded surface. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Using hard drives CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Save your work and shut down the computer before adding or replacing a memory module or hard drive. If you are not sure whether the computer is off, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. Intel Smart Response Technology (select models only) Intel Smart Response Technology (SRT) is an Intel Rapid Storage Technology (RST) caching feature that significantly enhances computer system performance. SRT allows computers with an SSD mSATA module to be used as cache memory between the system memory and hard disk drive. This provides the advantage of having a hard disk drive (or a RAID volume) for maximum storage capacity while simultaneously delivering SSD enhanced system performance experience. If you add or upgrade a hard drive and intend to set a RAID volume, you must temporarily disable SRT, set the RAID volume, and then enable SRT. To temporarily disable SRT:

44 Chapter 8 Drives Select Start > All Programs > Intel > Intel Rapid Storage Technology. Click the Acceleration link, and then click the Disable Acceleration link. 1. 2. 3. Wait for the Acceleration Mode to complete. 4. Click the Reset to Available link. IMPORTANT: You must temporarily disable SRT when changing RAID modes. Make the change and then re-

enable SRT. Failure to temporarily disable this feature will prevent you from creating or changing RAID volumes. NOTE: HP does not support SRT with self-encrypting drives (SEDs). Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. 3. Connect the computer to AC power. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. Click Defragment disk. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

Using hard drives 45 You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, they do not require HP 3D DriveGuard protection. NOTE: A hard drive in a primary hard drive bay or a secondary hard drive bay is protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select models only) is parked. To determine whether a drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, or in the Mobility Center. 46 Chapter 8 Drives 9 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Computer Setup utility (BIOS) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://hp-pt.absolute.com. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Security feature HP Client Security, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered face scenes, or other authentication credential Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (f10) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select models only), optional external hard drive (select models only), or internal network adapter DriveLock password or Automatic DriveLock password in Computer Setup*

Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data HP Drive Encryption software Windows Defender Unauthorized access to Computer Setup settings and other system identification information BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable)

*Computer Setup is a preinstalled, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use either a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Computer Setup utility that is preinstalled on the computer. Protecting the computer 47 BIOS administrator and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Automatic DriveLock passwords are enabled in Computer Setup. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If HP SpareKey has been set up previously, and if you forget the BIOS administrator password set in Computer Setup, you can use HP SpareKey to access the utility. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Computer Setup feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store your user names and passwords for all of your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password*

Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows Administrator password does not set the BIOS Administrator password. User password*

Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. 48 Chapter 9 Security Setting passwords in Computer Setup Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock. It is also used to remove DriveLock protection. This password is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can set a DriveLock password. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can set a DriveLock password.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

Setting a new BIOS administrator password 1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Setup BIOS Administrator Password, and then press enter. 2. 3. 4. When prompted, type a password. 5. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password 1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Change Password, and then press enter. 2. 3. 4. When prompted, type your current password. Using passwords 49 5. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password 1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Change Password, and then press enter. 2. 3. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. 7. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 8. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Managing a Computer Setup DriveLock password CAUTION: To prevent the DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, a password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator in order for it to be accessed by the DriveLock passwords. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can access the DriveLock features. To apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a user password and a master password must be set in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

50 Chapter 9 Security After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the user password or the master password. The owner of the user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The user password and the master password can be identical. You can delete a user password or master password only by removing DriveLock protection from the drive. DriveLock protection can be removed from the drive only with the master password. Setting a DriveLock password To set a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > DriveLock, and then press enter. Click Set DriveLock Password (global). Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. 7. 8. When prompted, type a master password, and then press enter. 9. When prompted, type the master password again to confirm, and then press enter. 10. When prompted, type a user password, and then press enter. 11. When prompted, type the user password again to confirm, and then press enter. 12. To confirm DriveLock protection on the drive you have selected, type DriveLock in the confirmation field, and then press enter. NOTE: The DriveLock confirmation is case sensitive. 13. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using passwords 51 Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 2 incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password 2. 3. To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > DriveLock, and then press enter. 4. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. 5. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys select Set DriveLock Password, and then press enter. 6. Use the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. 7. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Change Password. 8. When prompted, type your current password, and then press enter. 9. When prompted, type a new password, and then press enter. 10. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm, and then press enter. 11. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Removing DriveLock protection To remove DriveLock protection in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > DriveLock, and then press enter. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Set DriveLock Password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Disable protection. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 52 Chapter 9 Security 8. 9. Type your master password, and then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using Computer Setup Automatic DriveLock In a multiple-user environment, you can set an Automatic DriveLock password. When the Automatic DriveLock password is enabled, a random user password and a DriveLock master password will be created for you. When any user passes the password credential, the same random user and DriveLock master password will be used to unlock the drive. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can access the Automatic DriveLock features. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password To enable an Automatic DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Removing Automatic DriveLock protection To remove DriveLock protection in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2. 3. 4. 5. Using passwords 53 6. 7. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Disable protection. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer left the factory. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

54 Chapter 9 Security 1. 2. 3. Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. Run Windows Update monthly thereafter. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft website and through the updates link in Help and Support. Using HP Client Security (select models only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on select computer models. This software can be accessed through Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Installing an optional security cable NOTE: A security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. See Getting to know your computer on page 4 for the location of the security cable slot on your computer. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the cable lock (2). Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the cable lock with the key. Using HP Client Security (select models only) 55 10 Maintenance Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands). Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. 56 Chapter 10 Maintenance Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Using SoftPaq Download Manager HP SoftPaq Download Manager (SDM) is a tool that provides quick access to SoftPaq information for HP business computers without requiring the SoftPaq number. Using this tool, you can easily search for SoftPaqs, and then download and unpack them. SoftPaq Download Manager works by reading and downloading, from the HP FTP site, a published database file containing computer model and SoftPaq information. SoftPaq Download Manager allows you to specify one or more computer models to determine which SoftPaqs are available for download. SoftPaq Download Manager checks the HP FTP site for updates to the database and software. If updates are found, they are downloaded and applied automatically. SoftPaq Download Manager is available on the HP website. To use SoftPaq Download Manager to download SoftPaqs, you must first download and install the program. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/sdm, and follow the instructions to download and install SoftPaq Download Manager. To download SoftPaqs:

Select Start > All Programs > HP > HP SoftPaq Download Manager. NOTE:

If prompted by User Account Control, click Yes. Updating programs and drivers 57 11 Backup and recovery Your computer includes HP and Windows tools to help you safeguard your information and retrieve it if you ever need to. These tools will help you return your computer to a proper working state, all with simple steps. This section provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system Creating recovery media and backups 2. Recovery after a system failure is only as good as your most recent backup. 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a Windows 7 operating system DVD and a Driver Recovery DVD. The Windows DVD can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. The Driver Recovery DVD installs specific drivers and applications. See Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator on page 58. Use Windows Backup and Recovery tools to perform the following:

Back up individual files and folders Back up your entire hard drive (select models only) Create system repair discs (select models only) with the installed optical drive (select models only) or an optional external optical drive Create system restore points NOTE: This guide describes an overview of backing up, restoring, and recovering options. For more details about the tools provided, see Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save them for later use, in case of system instability. In case of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer. See Backing up your information on page 59. Guidelines When creating recovery media or backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, or DVDRW. The discs you use will depend on the type of optical drive you are using. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the recovery media creation process or the backup process. Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator HP Recovery Disc Creator is a software program that offers an alternative way to create recovery media. After you successfully set up the computer, you can create recovery media using HP Recovery Disc Creator. This recovery media allows you to reinstall your original operating system as well as select drivers and 58 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery applications if the hard drive becomes corrupted. HP Recovery Disc Creator can create two kinds of recovery DVDs:

Windows 7 operating system DVDInstalls the operating system without additional drivers or applications. Driver Recovery DVDInstalls specific drivers and applications only, in the same way that the HP Software Setup utility installs drivers and applications. Creating recovery media NOTE: The Windows 7 operating system DVD can be created only once. Thereafter, the option to create that media will not be available after you create a Windows DVD. Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Recovery Disc Creator. Select Windows disk. From the drop-down menu, select the drive for burning the recovery media. Click the Create button to start the burning process. To create the Windows DVD:

1. 2. 3. 4. After the Windows 7 operating system DVD has been created, create the Driver Recovery DVD:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Recovery Disc Creator. Select Driver disk. From the drop-down menu, select the drive for burning the recovery media. Click the Create button to start the burning process. Backing up your information You should create system repair media and your initial backup immediately after initial system setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. You should also create Windows system repair media (select models only) which can be used to start up (boot) the computer and repair the operating system in case of system instability or failure. Your initial and subsequent backups allow you to restore your data and settings if a failure occurs. You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs. Note the following when backing up:

Store personal files in the Documents library, and back it up regularly. Back up templates that are stored in their associated directories. Save customized settings that appear in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. When backing up to discs, number each disc after removing it from the drive. For detailed instructions on various backup and restore options, perform a search for these topics in NOTE:

Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. Creating recovery media and backups 59 To create a backup using Windows Backup and Restore:

NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the computer. 1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your backup, create a system image (select models only), or create system repair media (select models only). Performing a system recovery In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:

Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Startup Repair to fix problems that might prevent Windows from starting correctly. f11 recovery tools (select models only): You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image. The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory. If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair media you NOTE:

previously created (select models only), you must purchase Windows 7 operating system media to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 61. Using the Windows recovery tools Using the Windows recovery tools, you can:

Recover individual files Restore the computer to a previous system restore point Recover information using recovery tools For detailed instructions on various recovery and restore options, perform a search for these topics NOTE:

in Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. To recover information you previously backed up:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to recover your system settings, your computer (select models only), or your files. To recover your information using Startup Repair, follow these steps:

CAUTION: Some Startup Repair options will completely erase and reformat the hard drive. All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as the drivers, software, and utilities from the backup used for recovery. 60 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If possible, back up all personal files. If possible, check for the presence of the Windows partition. To check for the Windows partition, select Start > Computer. NOTE:

If the Windows partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs using the Windows 7 operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery media. For additional information, see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 61. If the Windows partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press f8 before the Windows operating system loads. Select Startup Repair. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, select Start > Help NOTE:

and Support. Using f11 recovery tools (select models only) CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. The f11 recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled. To recover the original hard drive image using f11:

1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition: click Start, right-click Computer, click Manage, and then click Disk Management. If the HP Recovery partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and NOTE:

programs using the Windows 7 operating system media and the Driver Recovery media. For additional information, see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 61. 3. 4. 5. If the HP Recovery partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Windows 7 operating system media If you cannot use the recovery media you previously created using the HP Recovery Disc Creator (select models only), you must purchase a Windows 7 operating system DVD to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. To order a Windows 7 operating system DVD, go to the HP website. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/support. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. You can also order the DVD by calling support. For contact information, see the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. CAUTION: Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities. Performing a system recovery 61 To initiate recovery using a Windows 7 operating system DVD:

NOTE: This process takes several minutes. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Restart the computer, and then insert the Windows 7 operating system DVD into the optical drive before the Windows operating system loads. Follow the on-screen instructions. Click Next. Select Repair your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. When prompted, press any keyboard key. 4. 5. 6. 7. After the repair is completed:

1. 2. Eject the Windows 7 operating system DVD and then insert the Driver Recovery DVD. Install the Hardware Enabling Drivers first, and then install Recommended Applications. 62 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup To navigate and select in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: You can use either a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. 2. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to click the item. To scroll up and down, click the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:

Click the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Using Computer Setup 63 Use the arrow keys to select Main > Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus:

Click the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. 2. 3. 4. 5. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Main > Restore Defaults. Follow the on-screen instructions. To save your changes and exit, click the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. 64 Chapter 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Start Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Main > System Information. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, click the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. 3. Access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Select Updates and tune-ups, and then select Check for HP updates now. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. b. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

Using Computer Setup 65 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Start > Computer. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using MultiBoot About the boot device order As the computer starts, the system attempts to boot from enabled devices. The MultiBoot utility, which is enabled at the factory, controls the order in which the system selects a boot device. Boot devices can include optical drives, diskette drives, a network interface card (NIC), hard drives, and USB devices. Boot devices contain bootable media or files that the computer needs to start and operate properly. NOTE: Some boot devices must be enabled in Computer Setup before they can be included in the boot order. You can change the order in which the computer searches for a boot device by changing the boot order in Computer Setup. You can also press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and then press f9. Pressing f9 displays a menu that shows the current boot devices and allows you to select a boot device. Or, you can use MultiBoot Express to set the computer to prompt you for a boot location each time the computer turns on or restarts. Choosing MultiBoot preferences You can use MultiBoot in the following ways:

To set a new boot order that the computer uses each time it is turned on, by changing the boot order in Computer Setup. To dynamically choose the boot device, by pressing esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and then pressing f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. To use MultiBoot Express to set variable boot orders. This feature prompts you for a boot device each time the computer is turned on or restarted. Setting a new boot order in Computer Setup To start Computer Setup and set a boot device order that the computer uses each time it is turned on or restarted, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select the Legacy Boot Order list, and then press enter. 2. 3. 66 Chapter 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 4. 5. To move the device up in the boot order, use a pointing device to click the up arrow, or press the + key. or To move the device down in the boot order, use a pointing device to click the down arrow, or press the -

key. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Dynamically choosing a boot device using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:

1. Open the Select Boot Device menu by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f9. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select a boot device, then press enter. 2. 3. Setting a MultiBoot Express prompt To start Computer Setup and set the computer to display the MultiBoot startup location menu each time the computer is started or restarted, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Boot Options, and then press enter. In the MultiBoot Express Popup Delay (Sec) field, enter the length of time in seconds that you want the computer to display the startup location menu before it defaults to the current MultiBoot setting.

(When 0 is selected, the Express Boot startup location menu is not displayed.) To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering MultiBoot Express preferences When the Express Boot menu is displayed during startup, you have the following choices:

Using MultiBoot 67 To specify a boot device from the Express Boot menu, select your preference within the allotted time, and then press enter. To prevent the computer from defaulting to the current MultiBoot setting, press any key before the allotted time expires. The computer will not start until you select a boot device and press enter. To allow the computer to start according to the current MultiBoot settings, wait for the allotted time to expire. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) (select models only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine if the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside of the operating system to isolate hardware failures from issues that may be caused by the operating system or other software components. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. After pressing f2, the BIOS searches three places for the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tools in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 68. Hard drive BIOS b. c. Use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test while it is running, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Go to http://www.hp.com. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 68 Chapter 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 13 Support Contacting support If the information provided in this user guide or Help and Support does not address your questions, you can contact support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Here you can:

Chat online with an HP technician. NOTE: When support chat is not available in a particular language, it is available in English. E-mail support. Find support telephone numbers. Locate an HP service center. Contacting support 69 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. IMPORTANT: All labels described in this section will be located in one of 3 places depending on your computer model: affixed to the bottom of the computer, located in the battery bay, or under the service door. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Serial number Product number Warranty period Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label (select models only prior to Windows 8)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. HP platforms preinstalled with Windows 8 or Windows 8.1 do not have the physical label, but have a Digital Product Key electronically installed. NOTE: This Digital Product Key is automatically recognized and activated by Microsoft Operating Systems on a reinstall of the Windows 8 or Windows 8.1 operating system with HP-approved recovery methods. Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 70 Chapter 13 Support 14 Specifications Input power Operating environment Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage and current Rating 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Input power 71 A Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards, from the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate on the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your bags. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 72 Appendix A Traveling with or shipping your computer B Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources Access website links and additional information about the computer through Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Some checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection. HP also provides additional tools that do not require an Internet connection. Contact HP support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Choose from the following types of support:

Chat online with an HP technician. NOTE: When chat is not available in a particular language, it is available in English. Find HP support worldwide telephone numbers. Locate an HP service center. Resolving issues The following sections describe several common issues and solutions. The computer is unable to start up If the computer does not turn on when you press the power button, the following suggestions may help you determine why the computer does not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, plug another electrical device into the outlet to be sure that the outlet is providing adequate power. NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved by HP for this computer. If the computer is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank but you have not turned off the computer, one or more of these settings may be the cause:

The computer may be in the Sleep state. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. Sleep is an energy-saving feature that turns off the display. Sleep can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but is not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, right-click the Battery icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Preferences. The computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display, such as a monitor, is Troubleshooting resources 73 connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external displays, and simultaneous display on all devices. Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, restart the computer. Click Start, click the arrow next to Shut down, and then select Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, see the next section, The computer is on but not responding on page 74. The computer is on but not responding If the computer is turned on but is not responding to software or keyboard commands, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). NOTE: The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during operation. An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device according to the manufacturer's instructions. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is older, is compatible with the operating system. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. The wireless network connection is not working If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

74 Appendix B Troubleshooting To enable or disable a wireless or wired network device, right-click the Network Connection icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. To enable devices, select the check box from the menu option. To disable the device, clear the check box. Be sure that the wireless device is turned on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennas are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and to the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. A disc does not play Save your work and close all open programs before playing a CD or a DVD. Log off the Internet before playing a CD or a DVD. Be sure that you insert the disc properly. Be sure that the disc is clean. If necessary, clean the disc with filtered water and a lint-free cloth. Wipe from the center of the disc to the outer edge. Check the disc for scratches. If you find scratches, treat the disc with an optical disc repair kit available at many electronics stores. Disable Sleep mode before playing the disc. Do not initiate Sleep while playing a disc. Otherwise, you may see a warning message asking if you want to continue. If this message is displayed, click No. After you click No, the computer may behave in either of the following ways:

Playback may resume. or The playback window in the multimedia program may close. To return to playing the disc, click the Play button in your multimedia program to restart the disc. In rare cases, you may need to exit the program and then restart it. A movie is not visible on an external display 1. 2. If both the computer display and an external display are turned on, press fn+f4 one or more times to switch between the 2 displays. Configure the monitor settings to make the external display primary:

a. From the Windows desktop, right-click on a blank area of the computer desktop, and select Screen resolution. Specify a primary display and a secondary display. b. NOTE: When using both displays, the DVD image will not appear on any display designated as the secondary display. Resolving issues 75 The process of burning a disc does not begin, or it stops before completion Be sure that all other programs are closed. Turn off Sleep mode. Be sure that you are using the right kind of disc for your drive. Be sure that the disc is inserted properly. Select a slower write speed and try again. If you are copying a disc, save the information on the source disc to your hard drive before trying to burn the contents to a new disc, and then burn from your hard drive. 76 Appendix B Troubleshooting C Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, unplug it after being properly grounded and before removing a cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, contact HP support. 77 Index Symbols/Numerics 2-finger pinch zoom TouchPad gesture 22 A AC adapter, testing 38 AC adapter/battery light 4 administrator password 48 antivirus software 54 audio functions, checking 28 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 5 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 5 Automatic DriveLock password entering 53 removing 53 B Backup and Restore 60 backup tools 58 backups creating 59 recovering 60 battery conserving power 37 discharging 36 displaying remaining charge 36 low battery levels 36 Battery Check 36 battery information, finding 36 battery power 35 BIOS determining version 65 downloading an update 65 updating 65 Bluetooth device 13, 18 Bluetooth label 70 buttons left TouchPad 8 media 27 power 10, 33 right TouchPad 8 volume 27 Windows button 11, 25 78 Index C cables USB 42 caps lock light, identifying 9 caring for your computer 56 checking audio functions 28 cleaning your computer 56 components bottom 12 display 6 front 12 left side 5 right side 4 top 7 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 49 DriveLock password 50 navigating and selecting 63 restoring factory settings 64 computer, traveling 72 configuring audio for HDMI 31 connecting to a WLAN 16 connector, power 4 conservation, power 37 corporate WLAN connection 16 critical battery level 33 critical updates, software 54 D Disk Cleanup software 45 Disk Defragmenter software 45 display image, switching 23 drive media 33 DriveLock password changing 52 description 50 entering 52 removing 52 setting 51 Driver Recovery DVD, creating 58 using for restore 61 drives external 43 handling 44 hard 43 optical 43 using 44 E electrostatic discharge 77 embedded numeric keypad, identifying 11, 24 esc key, identifying 11 external AC power, using 37 external devices 42 external drive 43 external monitor port 5, 30 F f11 recovery 61 firewall software 54 fn key, identifying 11, 23 function keys, identifying 11 H hard drive external 43 HP 3D DriveGuard 45 hard drive light 46 hard drive light, identifying 12 hard drive recovery 61 HDMI port, connecting 30 HDMI port, identifying 5 HDMI, configuring audio 31 headphone (audio-out) jack 5 headphones and microphones, connecting 28 Help and Support hot key 23 Hibernation exiting 34 initiating 34 high-definition devices, connecting 30, 31 hot keys adjusting volume 23, 24 decrease screen brightness 24 decreasing speaker sound 24 description 23 Help and Support 23 increase screen brightness 24 increasing speaker sound 24 keyboard backlight 24 muting speaker sound 23 Sleep 23 switching screen image 23 Touchpad 23 using 23 wireless 24 hot keys, media 27 HP 3D DriveGuard 45 HP Client Security 55 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 17 HP Recovery Disc Creator, using 58 HP Recovery partition checking for presence 61 using for recovery 61 hubs 41 I input power 71 Intel Wireless Display 31 internal display switch 6 Internet connection setup 15 issues, resolving 73 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5 audio-out (headphone) 5 network 4 RJ-45 (network) 4 K keyboard backlight 24 keyboard hot keys, identifying 23 keypad embedded numeric 11 identifying 24 keypad, external num lock 26 using 26 keys esc 11 fn 11 function 11 media 27 volume 27 L labels Bluetooth 70 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 70 regulatory 70 serial number 70 wireless certification 70 WLAN 70 legacy support, USB 63 lights AC adapter/battery 4 caps lock 9 hard drive 12 power 9 RJ-45 (network) status 4 TouchPad 9 wireless 7, 9 lights, hard drive 46 low battery level 36 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 45 Disk Defragmenter 45 media activity controls 27 media hot keys 27 memory card inserting 40 removing 40 supported formats 40 memory card reader, identifying 4 microphone (audio-in) jack, identifying 5 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 70 mouse, external setting preferences 20 mute key, identifying 23 N network jack, identifying 4 num lock, external keypad 26 O operating environment 71 optical drive 43 optional external devices, using 42 P passwords administrator 48 BIOS administrator 49 DriveLock 50 user 48 pointing devices, setting preferences 20 ports external monitor 5, 30 HDMI 5, 30 Intel Wireless Display 31 VGA 30 power battery 35 conserving 37 options 33 power button 33 power button, identifying 10 power connector, identifying 4 power lights 9 power switch 33 power-saving states 33 product name and number, computer 70 public WLAN connection 16 R readable media 33 recovery media, creating 58 recovery media, using for restore 61 recovery partition 61 recovery tools 58 recovery tools, Windows 60 recovery, system 60 regulatory information regulatory label 70 wireless certification labels 70 restoring the hard drive 61 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 4 RJ-45 (network) lights, identifying 4 S screen brightness keys 24 screen image, switching 23 scrolling TouchPad gesture 22 security cable slot, identifying 5 security, wireless 16 Index 79 security 16 using 14 WLAN antennas, identifying 6 WLAN device 14, 70 WLAN label 70 writable media 33 WWAN antennas, identifying 6 WWAN device 13, 16 USB 3.0 port 4, 5 USB cable, connecting 42 USB devices connecting 42 description 41 removing 42 USB hubs 41 USB legacy support 63 USB ports, identifying 4, 5 user password 48 using external AC power 37 power-saving states 33 V vents, identifying 5, 12 VGA port, connecting 30 video 29 volume adjusting 27 buttons 27 keys 27 volume keys, identifying 23, 24 W webcam 6, 28 webcam, identifying 6 Windows 7 operating system DVD creating 58 using for restore 61 Windows 7 operating system media creating 58 using for restore 61 Windows button, identifying 11, 25 Windows Startup Repair, using 60 wireless antennas, identifying 6 wireless button 13 wireless certification label 70 wireless controls button 13 operating system 13 wireless key, identifying 24 wireless light 7, 9, 13 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 16 corporate WLAN connection 16 equipment needed 15 functional range 16 public WLAN connection 16 serial number 70 serial number, computer 70 setting password protection on wakeup 35 setting power options 33 setup of WLAN 15 setup utility navigating and selecting 63 restoring factory settings 64 shutdown 33 SIM inserting 17 Sleep exiting 34 initiating 34 slots security cable 5 SoftPaqs, downloading 57 software antivirus 54 critical updates 54 Disk Cleanup 45 Disk Defragmenter 45 firewall 54 speakers, identifying 10 Startup Repair, using 60 switch, power 33 T testing an AC adapter 38 TouchPad buttons 8 using 20 TouchPad gestures 2-finger pinch zoom 22 scrolling 22 using 20 TouchPad light, identifying 9 TouchPad zone identifying 8 traveling with the computer 70, 72 troubleshooting disc burning 76 disc play 75 troubleshooting, external display 75 turning off the computer 33 U unresponsive system 33 80 Index

User Guide Product notice Software terms This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel and Centrino are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Java is a U.S. trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2015 Document Part Number: 807292001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). ENWW iii iv Safety warning notice ENWW Processor configuration setting (select models only) IMPORTANT: Select computer models are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. ENWW v vi Processor configuration setting (select models only) ENWW Table of contents 1 Welcome ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 5 Right ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Left ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Display ................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Top ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Top cover ............................................................................................................................................. 8 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 9 Lights ................................................................................................................................................. 10 Buttons and speakers ....................................................................................................................... 11 Keys ................................................................................................................................................... 12 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Front ..................................................................................................................................................................... 14 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless button ............................................................................................... 15 Using operating system controls ................................................................................... 16 Using a WLAN ..................................................................................................................................... 16 Using an Internet service provider ................................................................................. 16 Setting up a WLAN .......................................................................................................... 17 Configuring a wireless router ......................................................................................... 17 Protecting your WLAN ..................................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ..................................................................................................... 18 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................ 18 Inserting and removing a SIM ......................................................................................... 19 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ..................................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................................... 20 ENWW vii Connecting to a local area network (LAN) ........................................................................................ 21 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices .............................................................. 23 Using pointing devices ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................. 24 Using the TouchPad and gestures .................................................................................................... 24 Turning the TouchPad off and on ................................................................................... 25 Tapping ........................................................................................................................... 25 Scrolling .......................................................................................................................... 26 2-finger pinch zoom ....................................................................................................... 26 Edge swipes (select models only) .................................................................................. 27 Right-edge swipe .......................................................................................... 27 Left-edge swipe ............................................................................................ 27 Top-edge swipe ............................................................................................ 28 Using the keyboard .............................................................................................................................................. 29 Using Windows shortcut keys ........................................................................................................... 29 Identifying the hot keys .................................................................................................................... 29 Using keypads ................................................................................................................................... 30 Using the embedded numeric keypad ............................................................................ 31 Turning the embedded numeric keypad on and off .................................... 32 Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad ....................... 32 Using an optional external numeric keypad .................................................................. 32 5 Multimedia ................................................................................................................................................. 33 Using the media activity controls ........................................................................................................................ 33 Audio .................................................................................................................................................................... 33 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 33 Adjusting the volume ........................................................................................................................ 33 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 34 Connecting headphones and microphones ...................................................................................... 34 Checking audio functions on the computer ...................................................................................... 34 Webcam (select models only) ............................................................................................................................. 35 Video .................................................................................................................................................................... 35 VGA .................................................................................................................................................... 35 HDMI (select models only) ................................................................................................................ 36 Configuring audio for HDMI ............................................................................................................... 37 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select models only) ........ 38 6 Power management ..................................................................................................................................... 39 Shutting down the computer .............................................................................................................................. 39 viii ENWW Setting power options ......................................................................................................................................... 40 Using power-saving states ............................................................................................................... 40 Intel Rapid Start Technology (select models only) ........................................................ 40 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................. 40 Enabling and exiting user-initiated Hibernation ............................................................ 41 Using the power meter and power settings ................................................................... 41 Setting password protection on wakeup ....................................................................... 41 Using battery power .......................................................................................................................... 42 Factory-sealed battery ................................................................................................... 42 Finding additional battery information .......................................................................... 42 Using Battery Check ........................................................................................................ 43 Displaying the remaining battery charge ....................................................................... 43 Maximizing battery discharge time ................................................................................ 43 Managing low battery levels .......................................................................................... 43 Identifying low battery levels ...................................................................... 43 Resolving a low battery level ....................................................................... 44 Conserving battery power .............................................................................................. 44 Using external AC power ................................................................................................................... 44 Testing an AC adapter ..................................................................................................... 45 7 External cards and devices ........................................................................................................................... 47 Using memory card readers (select models only) .............................................................................................. 47 Inserting a memory card ................................................................................................................... 47 Removing a memory card ................................................................................................................. 47 Using a USB device ............................................................................................................................................... 48 Connecting a USB device ................................................................................................................... 49 Removing a USB device ..................................................................................................................... 49 Using optional external devices .......................................................................................................................... 49 Using optional external drives .......................................................................................................... 50 8 Drives ......................................................................................................................................................... 51 Handling drives .................................................................................................................................................... 51 Using hard drives ................................................................................................................................................. 51 Intel Smart Response Technology (select models only) .................................................................. 52 Improving hard drive performance ................................................................................................... 52 Using Disk Defragmenter ............................................................................................... 52 Using Disk Cleanup ......................................................................................................... 53 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) .................................................................................. 53 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 53 ENWW ix 9 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 55 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 55 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 56 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 56 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 57 Managing a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................................... 57 Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 58 Managing a Computer Setup DriveLock password ........................................................................... 58 Setting a DriveLock password ........................................................................................ 59 Entering a DriveLock password ...................................................................................... 60 Changing a DriveLock password ..................................................................................... 60 Removing DriveLock protection ..................................................................................... 60 Using Computer Setup Automatic DriveLock ................................................................................... 61 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password .................................................................. 61 Removing Automatic DriveLock protection ................................................................... 61 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................................... 62 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................................... 62 Installing critical security updates ...................................................................................................................... 63 Using HP Client Security ...................................................................................................................................... 63 Installing an optional security cable ................................................................................................................... 63 10 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................. 65 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 65 Cleaning procedures ......................................................................................................................... 65 Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) ........................................................... 65 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 66 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ................................................................ 66 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 66 Using SoftPaq Download Manager ...................................................................................................................... 66 11 Backup and recovery .................................................................................................................................. 67 Backing up your information ............................................................................................................................... 67 Performing a system recovery ............................................................................................................................ 67 Using the Windows recovery tools ................................................................................................... 68 Using f11 recovery tools ................................................................................................................... 68 Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) ................................................... 69 Using Windows Refresh or Windows Reset ...................................................................................... 70 Using HP Software Setup .................................................................................................................. 70 x ENWW 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) .................................................... 71 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 71 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 71 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 71 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 72 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 73 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................ 73 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 73 Using MultiBoot ................................................................................................................................................... 75 About the boot device order ............................................................................................................. 75 Choosing MultiBoot preferences ...................................................................................................... 75 Setting a new boot order in Computer Setup ................................................................. 75 Dynamically choosing a boot device using the f9 prompt ............................................. 76 Setting a MultiBoot Express prompt .............................................................................. 76 Entering MultiBoot Express preferences ....................................................................... 76 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) .......................................................................................................... 77 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device .................................................. 77 13 Support ..................................................................................................................................................... 79 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 79 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 80 14 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 81 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 82 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 83 Appendix A Traveling with the computer .......................................................................................................... 85 Appendix B Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 87 Troubleshooting resources ................................................................................................................................. 87 Resolving issues .................................................................................................................................................. 87 The computer is unable to start up .................................................................................................. 87 The computer screen is blank ........................................................................................................... 87 Software is functioning abnormally ................................................................................................. 88 The computer is on but not responding ........................................................................................... 88 The computer is unusually warm ..................................................................................................... 88 An external device is not working ..................................................................................................... 88 The wireless network connection is not working ............................................................................. 89 A disc does not play ........................................................................................................................... 89 A movie is not visible on an external display .................................................................................... 90 ENWW xi The process of burning a disc does not begin, or it stops before completion ................................. 90 Appendix C Electrostatic discharge .................................................................................................................. 91 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 93 xii ENWW 1 Welcome After you set up and register the computer, it is important to take the following steps:

Take a minute to browse the printed Windows Basics guide to explore the new Windows features. TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key previous screen. on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the Connect to the InternetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the Internet. For more information, see Connecting to a network on page 15. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 62. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Getting to know your computer on page 5 and Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices on page 23 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

From the Start screen, type a, click Apps, and then select from the displayed options. For details about using the software included with the computer, see the software manufacturer's instructions, which may be provided with the software or on the manufacturer's website. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backup and recovery on page 67. ENWW 1 Finding information You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resources Setup Instructions poster Windows Basics guide HP Support Assistant To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/

support, and select your country. Select Drivers &

Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. HP website To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/

support, and select your country. Select Drivers &

Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access this guide:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 2. Select My computer, and then select User guides. For information about How to set up the computer Help to identify computer components Overview of using Windows Operating system information Software, driver, and BIOS updates Troubleshooting tools How to access support Online chat with an HP technician Email support Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Support information Ordering parts and finding additional help Accessories available for the device Proper workstation setup, posture, health, and work habits Electrical and mechanical safety information Regulatory and safety information Battery disposal information 2 Chapter 1 Welcome ENWW Resources Limited Warranty*

For information about Warranty information To access this guide, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For some countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. ENWW Finding information 3 4 Chapter 1 Welcome ENWW 2 Getting to know your computer Right Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) USB 3.0 ports Memory card reader Each USB 3.0 port connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 48. Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. RJ-45 (network) jack/lights Connects a network cable.

(4) AC adapter/Battery light Green (left): The network is connected. Amber (right): Activity is occurring on the network. White: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 90 to 99 percent. Amber: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 0 to 90 percent. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged.

(5) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. ENWW Right 5 Left Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer.

(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. HDMI port USB 3.0 port Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Each USB 3.0 port connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 48. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-

in (microphone). 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) WLAN antennas (2)*

WWAN antennas (2)*

Webcam light Webcam Internal microphone Internal display switch Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWAN). On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. For information on using the webcam, access HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. Record sound. Turns off the display or initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The display switch is not visible from the outside of the computer.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. ENWW Display 7 Top Top cover Component

(1) Wireless light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Description NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. For more information, see Edge swipes (select models only) on page 27. Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. ENWW Top 9 Lights Component

(1) Power light

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light TouchPad light Mute light Wireless light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology NOTE:

feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using power-saving states on page 40. On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. On: The TouchPad is off. Off: The TouchPad is on. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Buttons and speakers Component

(1) Power button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. If the computer has stopped responding and the previous shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for 15 seconds to perform a hardware reset turning off the computer immediately. For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology NOTE:

feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using power-saving states on page 40. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications.

(2) Speakers (2) Produce sound. ENWW Top 11 Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Windows key Function keys Embedded numeric keypad Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key, the num lk key, the esc key, or the b key. Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. When the keypad is turned on, it can be used like an external numeric keypad. Each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW Bottom Component

(1) Vent Enable airflow to cool internal components. Description NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. ENWW Bottom 13 Front Component

(1) Hard drive light Description Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. For more information about HP 3D DriveGuard, NOTE:

see Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) on page 53. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer ENWW 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks

(commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button, wireless switch, or wireless key (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (white) when you turn on the computer. ENWW Connecting to a wireless network 15 The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. For more information, access HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless computer to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network ENWW Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the NOTE:

network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to e-mail that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a firewall. A firewall checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. ENWW Connecting to a wireless network 17 Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, access HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Sign in. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider

(called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP supports the following technologies:

18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network ENWW HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. LTE (Long Term Evolution), which provides access to networks supporting LTE technology. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM. A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about inserting and removing the SIM, see Inserting and removing a SIM on page 19 in this chapter. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Inserting and removing a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off the computer by using the Shut down command. Close the display. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. ENWW Connecting to a wireless network 19 6. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. NOTE: The SIM in your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. 7. 8. 9. Reconnect external power. Reconnect external devices. Turn on the computer. To remove a SIM, gently pull on the SIM and remove it from the slot. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network (PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting to a wired network There are 2 kinds of wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connection. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network ENWW Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. ENWW Connecting to a wired network 21 22 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network ENWW 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices Your computer allows navigation using touch gestures (select models only) in addition to the keyboard and mouse. Touch gestures can be used on your computer TouchPad or on a touch screen (select models only). Review the Windows Basics guide included with your computer. The guide provides information on common tasks using the TouchPad, touch screen, or the keyboard. Select computer models have special action keys or hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. ENWW 23 Using pointing devices NOTE:

(purchased separately) by connecting it to one of the USB ports on the computer. In addition to the pointing devices included with your computer, you can use an external USB mouse Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. You can also view demonstrations of TouchPad gestures. To access Mouse Properties:

From the Start screen, type mouse, click Settings, and then select Mouse. Using the TouchPad and gestures The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen and control the pointer by using simple finger movements. TIP: Use the left and right buttons on the TouchPad as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. 24 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Turning the TouchPad off and on To turn the TouchPad off and on, press the f2 and fn keys at the same time. Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the Tap function on the TouchPad. Tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. ENWW Using pointing devices 25 Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. 26 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Edge swipes (select models only) Edge swipes allow you to access toolbars on your computer for tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Swipe your finger gently from the right edge to reveal the charms. Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Swipe your finger gently from the left edge of the TouchPad to switch between recently opened apps. Swipe from the left edge of the TouchPad to switch between apps. ENWW Using pointing devices 27 Top-edge swipe The top-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge to reveal the app command options. 28 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Using the keyboard The keyboard and mouse allow you to type select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. TIP: The Windows key app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the Start screen from an open NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using Windows shortcut keys Windows provides shortcuts so that you can perform actions quickly. Press the Windows key in combination with a specific key to perform a designated action. alone or For commonly used shortcuts, see the Windows Basics guide. Identifying the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key (2) and either the esc key (1) or one of the function keys (4). To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hot key combination. Hot key combination Description fn+esc Displays system information. fn+f1 Opens Help and Support. Help and Support provides tutorials, answers to questions, and product updates. ENWW Using the keyboard 29 Hot key combination Description fn+f2 Activates or deactivates the Touchpad. fn+f3 Initiates Sleep, which saves your information in system memory. The display and other system components turn off and power is conserved. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. fn+f4 Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing fn+f4 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information on the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f4 hot key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information on the computer. fn+f5 Mutes or restores speaker sound. fn+ f6 Decreases speaker volume. fn+f7 Increases speaker volume. fn+f8 Mutes the microphone. fn+f9 Decreases the screen brightness level. fn+f10 Increases the screen brightness level. fn+f11 Turns the keyboard backlight on and off. NOTE: The keyboard backlight is turned on at the factory. To extend battery life, turn off the keyboard backlight. fn+f12 Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: This key does not establish a wireless connection. To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must be set up. Using keypads The computer includes an embedded numeric keypad, and it also supports an optional external numeric keypad, or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. 30 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW Using the embedded numeric keypad Component

(1) fn key

(2) Embedded numeric keypad

(3) Windows key Description Turns the embedded numeric keypad on and off when pressed in combination with the num lk key. NOTE: The embedded numeric keypad will not function while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the computer. When the keypad is turned on, it can be used like an external numeric keypad. Each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key. Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. ENWW Using the keyboard 31 Turning the embedded numeric keypad on and off Press fn+num lk to turn on the embedded numeric keypad. Press fn+num lk again to turn off the keypad. NOTE: The embedded numeric keypad is turned off while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the computer. Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad You can temporarily alternate the functions of keys on the embedded numeric keypad between their standard keyboard functions and their keypad functions:

To use the navigational function of a keypad key while the keypad is off, press and hold the fn key while pressing the keypad key. To use the standard function of a keypad key while the keypad is on:

Press and hold the fn key to type in lowercase. Press and hold fn+shift to type in uppercase. Using an optional external numeric keypad Keys on most external numeric keypads function differently according to whether num lock is on or off. (Num lock is turned off at the factory.) For example:

When num lock is on, most keypad keys type numbers. When num lock is off, most keypad keys function like the arrow, page up, or page down keys. When num lock on an external keypad is turned on, the num lock light on the computer is turned on. When num lock on an external keypad is turned off, the num lock light on the computer is turned off. To turn num lock on or off on an external keypad as you work:

Press the num lk key on the external keypad, not on the computer. 32 Chapter 4 Navigating using the keyboard, touch gestures and pointing devices ENWW 5 Multimedia Your computer may include the following:

Integrated speaker(s) Integrated microphone(s) Integrated webcam Preinstalled multimedia software Multimedia buttons or keys Using the media activity controls Depending on your computer model, you may have the following media activity controls that allow you to play, pause, fast forward, or rewind a media file:

Media buttons Media hot keys (specific keys pressed in combination with the fn key) Media keys Audio On your HP computer, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port (or the audio-out jack) on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Configuring audio for HDMI on page 37. Before connecting audio devices, be sure to adjust the volume. Adjusting the volume Depending on your computer model, you can adjust the volume using the following:

ENWW Using the media activity controls 33 Volume buttons Volume hot keys (specific keys pressed in combination with the fn key) Volume keys WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: Volume can also be controlled through the operating system and some programs. NOTE: See Getting to know your computer on page 5 for information on what type of volume controls your computer has. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. Connecting headphones and microphones You can connect wired headphones or headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. Many headsets with integrated microphones are commercially available. To connect wireless headphones or headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Checking audio functions on the computer NOTE:

free of background noise. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. 3. When the Sound window opens, select the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm and then click Test. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. 34 Chapter 5 Multimedia ENWW To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. From the Start screen, type sound, and then select Sound Recorder. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Webcam (select models only) Some computers include an integrated webcam. With the preinstalled software, you can use the webcam to take a photo or record a video. You can preview and save the photo or video recording. The webcam software enables you to experiment with the following features:

Capturing and sharing video Streaming video with instant message software Taking still photos Video Your HP computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer without needing to connect to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Your computer may have an high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. Your computer has the following external video ports:

VGA HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions if you have questions. NOTE: See Getting to know your computer on page 5 for information about your computer's video ports. The external monitor port, or VGA port, is an analog display interface that connects an external VGA display device such as an external VGA monitor or a VGA projector to the computer. 1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. Webcam (select models only) 35 VGA ENWW 2. Press fn+f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

PC Screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, adjust the screen resolution of NOTE:

the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. HDMI (select models only) The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or to any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video and/or audio signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). One HDMI device can be connected to the HDMI port on the computer. The information displayed on the computer screen can be simultaneously displayed on the HDMI device. To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 36 Chapter 5 Multimedia ENWW 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device. Press fn+f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, adjust the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Configuring audio for HDMI To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your computer. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:

1. 2. 3. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the computer speakers, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. ENWW Video 37 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select models only) To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Swipe from the right edge of the Start screen, tap Devices, tap Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen to display the charms, click Devices, click Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 38 Chapter 5 Multimedia ENWW 6 Power management NOTE: A computer may have a power button or a power switch. The term power button is used throughout this guide to mean both types of power controls. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. The shutdown command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a Universal Serial Bus

(USB) port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows shutdown command:

NOTE:

shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation before 1. 2. 3. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedure, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete. Click the Power icon, and then click Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. ENWW Shutting down the computer 39 If the computer has stopped responding and the previous shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for 15 seconds to perform a hardware reset turning off the computer immediately. Disconnect the computer from external power. On models with a user-replaceable battery, remove the battery. Setting power options Using power-saving states Sleep is enabled at the factory. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external memory card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state. Intel Rapid Start Technology (select models only) For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology (RST) feature is enabled by default. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. Rapid Start Technology manages your power-saving options as follows:

SleepRapid Start Technology allows you to select the Sleep state. To exit from Sleep, press any key, activate the TouchPad, or press the power button briefly. HibernationRapid Start Technology initiates Hibernation after a period of inactivity while in the Sleep state when running on battery power or on external power or when the battery reaches a critical level. After Hibernation is initiated, press the power button to resume your work. NOTE: Rapid Start Technology can be disabled in Setup Utility (BIOS). If you want to be able to initiate the Hibernation state, you must enable user-initiated Hibernation using Power Options. See Enabling and exiting user-initiated Hibernation on page 41. Initiating and exiting Sleep With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen. When the charms list opens, click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and the computer returns to the screen where you stopped working. 40 Chapter 6 Power management ENWW NOTE:

before the computer will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Enabling and exiting user-initiated Hibernation You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Start screen, type power options, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. Click Save changes. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To reveal the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, on the Windows desktop, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. From the Start screen, type power options, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. ENWW Setting power options 41 Using battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. The computer runs on battery power whenever it is not plugged into external AC power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, running programs, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power, the computer automatically switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected on the computer or an AC power loss occurs. NOTE: When you disconnect AC power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. Select computer models can switch between graphic modes to increase battery life. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in Help and Support. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery(ies) in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding additional battery information HP Support Assistant provides the tools and information about the battery. To access battery information, select the HP Support Assistant app on the Start screen, and then select Battery and performance. Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:

To access battery information, select the HP Support Assistant app on the Start screen, and then select Battery and performance. 42 Chapter 6 Power management ENWW Using Battery Check HP Support Assistant provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to work properly. 2. To access battery information, select the HP Support Assistant app on the Start screen, and then select Battery and performance. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge Move the pointer over the power meter icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually decreases as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Remove the battery on the computer when it is not being used or charged, if the computer contains a user-replaceable battery. Store the user-replaceable battery in a cool, dry location. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. From the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select models only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The power meter icon in the notification area shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

settings on page 41. For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power ENWW Setting power options 43 If the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional docking or expansion device Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available To resolve a low battery level when no power source is available, save your work and shut down the computer. Conserving battery power From the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options. Select low power-use settings through Power Options. Turn off wireless and LAN connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source. Stop, disable, or remove any external memory cards that you are not using. Decrease screen brightness. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep, or shut down the computer. Using external AC power WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. NOTE:

computer box. For information on connecting to AC power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the External AC power is supplied through an approved AC adapter or an optional docking or expansion device. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a CD, a DVD, or a BD (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter When performing a backup or recovery 44 Chapter 6 Power management ENWW When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the power meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

NOTE: The following instructions apply to computers with user-replaceable batteries. 1. 2. 3. 4. Shut down the computer. Remove the battery on the computer. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. ENWW Setting power options 45 46 Chapter 6 Power management ENWW 7 External cards and devices Using memory card readers (select models only) Optional memory cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. To determine the memory card formats that are supported on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 5. Inserting a memory card CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the memory card connectors, use minimal force to insert a memory card. 1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Removing a memory card CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the memory card. 1. 2. Save your information and close all programs associated with the memory card. Click the remove hardware icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Then follow the on-screen instructions. ENWW Using memory card readers (select models only) 47 3. Press in on the card (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). NOTE:

If the card does not eject, pull the card out of the slot. Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, see the manufacturer's instructions. These instructions may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers website. The computer has at least 1 USB port that supports USB 1.0, 1.1, 2.0, or 3.0 devices. Your computer may also have a USB charging port that provides power to an external device. An optional docking device or USB hub provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. 48 Chapter 7 External cards and devices ENWW Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect the device. Connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. NOTE: The following illustration may look slightly different than your computer. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message in the notification area lets you know that the device is recognized by the computer. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. 1. 2. 3. To remove a USB device, save your information and close all programs associated with the device. Click the remove hardware icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Remove the device. Using optional external devices NOTE:

see the manufacturer's instructions. For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, To connect an external device to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. ENWW Using optional external devices 49 1. 2. 3. Connect the device to the computer. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Using optional external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. A USB drive can be added by connecting the drive to a USB port to the computer. NOTE: HP external USB optical drives should be connected to the powered USB port to the computer. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module External optical drive (CD, DVD, and Blu-ray) MultiBay device 50 Chapter 7 External cards and devices ENWW 8 Drives Handling drives CAUTION: Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. Observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching a grounded surface. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. Using hard drives CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Save your work and shut down the computer before adding or replacing a memory module or hard drive. ENWW Handling drives 51 If you are not sure whether the computer is off, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. Intel Smart Response Technology (select models only) Intel Smart Response Technology (SRT) is an Intel Rapid Storage Technology (RST) caching feature that significantly enhances computer system performance. SRT allows computers with an SSD mSATA module to be used as cache memory between the system memory and hard disk drive. This provides the advantage of having a hard disk drive (or a RAID volume) for maximum storage capacity while simultaneously delivering SSD enhanced system performance experience. If you add or upgrade a hard drive and intend to set a RAID volume, you must temporarily disable SRT, set the RAID volume, and then enable SRT. To temporarily disable SRT:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type Intel, and then select Intel Rapid Storage Technology. Click the Acceleration link, and then click the Disable Acceleration link. 3. Wait for the Acceleration Mode to complete. 4. Click the Reset to Available link. IMPORTANT: You must temporarily disable SRT when changing RAID modes. Make the change and then re-

enable SRT. Failure to temporarily disable this feature will prevent you from creating or changing RAID volumes. NOTE: HP does not support SRT with self-encrypting drives (SEDs). Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. Depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. You may want to set it to run during the night or at another time when you do not need access to your computer. HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. 3. Connect the computer to AC power. From the Start screen, type disk. Click Optimize. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. 52 Chapter 8 Drives ENWW For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary. NOTE: A hard drive in a primary hard drive bay or in a secondary hard drive bay is protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking devices or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that a drive in the primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select models only) is parked. To determine whether a drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, or in the Mobility Center. ENWW Using hard drives 53 54 Chapter 8 Drives ENWW 9 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Computer Setup utility (BIOS) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://hp-pt.absolute.com. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Security feature HP Client Security, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, or other authentication credential Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (f10) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select models only), optional external hard drive (select models only), or internal network adapter DriveLock password or Automatic DriveLock password in Computer Setup*

Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data HP Drive Encryption software Windows Defender Unauthorized access to Computer Setup settings and other system identification information BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable)

*Computer Setup is a preinstalled, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use either a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. ENWW Protecting the computer 55 Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Computer Setup utility that is preinstalled on the computer. BIOS administrator and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Automatic DriveLock passwords are enabled in Computer Setup. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If HP SpareKey has been set up previously, and if you forget the BIOS administrator password set in Computer Setup, you can use HP SpareKey to access the utility. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Computer Setup feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store your user names and passwords for all of your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password*

Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows Administrator password does not set the BIOS Administrator password. User password*

Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password from the Start screen, access HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. 56 Chapter 9 Security ENWW Setting passwords in Computer Setup Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock. It is also used to remove DriveLock protection. This password is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can set a DriveLock password. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can set a DriveLock password.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

Setting a new BIOS administrator password 1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Setup BIOS Administrator Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type a password. 5. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password 1. 2. ENWW Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Using passwords 57 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password 1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. 7. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 8. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Managing a Computer Setup DriveLock password CAUTION: To prevent the DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, a password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator in order for it to be accessed by the DriveLock passwords. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can access the DriveLock features. 58 Chapter 9 Security ENWW To apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a user password and a master password must be set in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the user password or the master password. The owner of the user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The user password and the master password can be identical. You can delete a user password or master password only by removing DriveLock protection from the drive. DriveLock protection can be removed from the drive only with the master password. Setting a DriveLock password To set a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > DriveLock, and then press enter. Click Set DriveLock Password (global). Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. 8. When prompted, type a master password, and then press enter. 9. When prompted, type the master password again to confirm, and then press enter. 10. When prompted, type a user password, and then press enter. 11. When prompted, type the user password again to confirm, and then press enter. 12. To confirm DriveLock protection on the drive you have selected, type DriveLock in the confirmation field, and then press enter. NOTE: The DriveLock confirmation is case sensitive. 13. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. ENWW Using passwords 59 Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 2 incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > DriveLock, and then press enter. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys select Set DriveLock Password, and then press enter. Use the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Change Password. 8. When prompted, type your current password, and then press enter. 9. When prompted, type a new password, and then press enter. 10. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm, and then press enter. 11. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Removing DriveLock protection To remove DriveLock protection in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > DriveLock, and then press enter. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Set DriveLock Password, and then press enter. 60 Chapter 9 Security ENWW 6. 7. 8. 9. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Disable protection. Type your master password, and then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using Computer Setup Automatic DriveLock In a multiple-user environment, you can set an Automatic DriveLock password. When the Automatic DriveLock password is enabled, a random user password and a DriveLock master password will be created for you. When any user passes the password credential, the same random user and DriveLock master password will be used to unlock the drive. NOTE: A BIOS Administrator password must be set before you can access the Automatic DriveLock features. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password To enable an Automatic DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Removing Automatic DriveLock protection To remove DriveLock protection in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. ENWW Using passwords 61 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Hard Drive Tools > Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Enter the BIOS Administrator password, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Disable protection. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you continue to use an antivirus program in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. 62 Chapter 9 Security ENWW Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can choose whether updates are installed automatically. To change the settings, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security HP Client Security software is preinstalled on computer models. This software can be accessed through the HP Client Security tile on the Start screen, the HP Client Security icon in the notification area at the far right of the taskbar, or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Installing an optional security cable NOTE: A security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. See Getting to know your computer on page 5 for the location of the security cable slot on your computer. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the cable lock (2). Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the cable lock with the key. ENWW Installing critical security updates 63 64 Chapter 9 Security ENWW 10 Maintenance Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands). Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. ENWW Cleaning your computer 65 Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis with the latest versions. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions. You can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Using SoftPaq Download Manager HP SoftPaq Download Manager (SDM) is a tool that provides quick access to SoftPaq information for HP business computers without requiring the SoftPaq number. Using this tool, you can easily search for SoftPaqs, and then download and unpack them. SoftPaq Download Manager works by reading and downloading, from the HP FTP site, a published database file containing computer model and SoftPaq information. SoftPaq Download Manager allows you to specify one or more computer models to determine which SoftPaqs are available for download. SoftPaq Download Manager checks the HP FTP site for updates to the database and software. If updates are found, they are downloaded and applied automatically. SoftPaq Download Manager is available on the HP website. To use SoftPaq Download Manager to download SoftPaqs, you must first download and install the program. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/sdm, and follow the instructions to download and install SoftPaq Download Manager. To download SoftPaqs:

From the Start screen, type s. In the search box, type softpaq, and then select HP SoftPaq Download Manager. Follow the instructions to download SoftPaqs. NOTE:

If prompted by User Account Control, click Yes. 66 Chapter 10 Maintenance ENWW 11 Backup and recovery To protect your information, use Windows backup and restore utilities to back up individual files and folders, back up your entire hard drive, create system repair media (select models only) by using the installed optical drive (select models only) or an optional external optical drive, or create system restore points. In case of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer. From the Start screen, type restore, click Settings, and then select from the list of displayed options. NOTE:

Windows Help and Support. For detailed instructions on various backup and restore options, perform a search for these topics in In case of system instability, HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save them for later use. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. For more information, see Windows Help and Support. Backing up your information Recovery after a system failure is as good as your most recent backup. You should create system repair media and your initial backup immediately after initial system setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. For more information on the Windows backup features, see Windows Help and Support. Performing a system recovery In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:

Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Automatic Repair to fix problems that might prevent Windows from starting correctly. f11 recovery tools: You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image. The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory. NOTE:

If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair media you previously created (select models only), you must purchase Windows operating system media to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, see Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) on page 69. ENWW Backing up your information 67 Using the Windows recovery tools To recover information you previously backed up, see Windows Help and Support for steps on restoring files and folders. To recover your information using Automatic Repair, follow these steps:

CAUTION: Some Startup Repair options will completely erase and reformat the hard drive. All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as the drivers, software, and utilities from the backup used for recovery. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If possible, back up all personal files. If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery Image partition and the Windows partition. From the Start screen, type file, and then click File Explorer. or From the Start screen, type pc, and then select This PC. If the Windows partition and the Recovery Image partition are not listed, you must recover your NOTE:

operating system and programs using the Windows operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery media (both purchased separately). For additional information, see Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) on page 69. If the Windows partition and the Recovery Image partition are listed, restart the computer by pressing and holding the shift key while clicking Restart. Select Troubleshoot, then select Advanced Options, and then select Startup Repair. Follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

these topics in Windows Help and Support. For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, perform a search for Using f11 recovery tools CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. The f11 recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled. To recover the original hard drive image using f11:

1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery Image partition: From the Start screen, type pc, and then select This PC. If the Recovery Image partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and NOTE:

programs using the Windows operating system media and the Driver Recovery media (both purchased separately). For additional information, see Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) on page 69. 68 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery ENWW 3. 4. 5. If the Recovery Image partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) To order a Windows operating system DVD, contact support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. CAUTION: Using a Windows operating system media completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities. To initiate a full install of the operating system using a Windows operating system DVD:

NOTE: This process takes several minutes. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the Windows operating system DVD into the optical drive, and then restart the computer. 3. When prompted, press any keyboard key. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. After the installation is completed:

1. 2. Eject the Windows operating system media and then insert the Driver Recovery media. Install the Hardware Enabling Drivers first, and then install Recommended Applications. ENWW Performing a system recovery 69 Using Windows Refresh or Windows Reset When your computer is not working properly and you need to regain system stability, the Windows Refresh option allows you to start fresh and keep what is important to you. The Windows Reset option allows you to perform detailed reformatting of your computer, or remove personal information before you give away or recycle your computer. For more information on these features, see Windows Help and Support. Using HP Software Setup HP Software Setup can be used to reinstall drivers or select software that has been corrupted or deleted from the system. 1. 2. 3. From the Start screen, type HP Software Setup. Open HP Software Setup. Follow the on-screen directions to reinstall drivers or select software. 70 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery ENWW 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup To navigate and select in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: You can use either a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. 2. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. ENWW Using Computer Setup 71 To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to click the item. To scroll up and down, click the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:

Click the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus:

Click the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Main > Restore Defaults. Follow the on-screen instructions. To save your changes and exit, click the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. 72 Chapter 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ENWW Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Start Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Main > System Information. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, click the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. From the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. b. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. ENWW Using Computer Setup 73 NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 74 Chapter 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ENWW Using MultiBoot About the boot device order As the computer starts, the system attempts to boot from enabled devices. The MultiBoot utility, which is enabled at the factory, controls the order in which the system selects a boot device. Boot devices can include optical drives, diskette drives, a network interface card (NIC), hard drives, and USB devices. Boot devices contain bootable media or files that the computer needs to start and operate properly. NOTE: Some boot devices must be enabled in Computer Setup before they can be included in the boot order. You can change the order in which the computer searches for a boot device by changing the boot order in Computer Setup. You can also press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and then press f9. Pressing f9 displays a menu that shows the current boot devices and allows you to select a boot device. Or, you can use MultiBoot Express to set the computer to prompt you for a boot location each time the computer turns on or restarts. Choosing MultiBoot preferences You can use MultiBoot in the following ways:

To set a new boot order that the computer uses each time it is turned on, by changing the boot order in Computer Setup. To dynamically choose the boot device, by pressing esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and then pressing f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. To use MultiBoot Express to set variable boot orders. This feature prompts you for a boot device each time the computer is turned on or restarted. Setting a new boot order in Computer Setup To start Computer Setup and set a boot device order that the computer uses each time it is turned on or restarted, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the following options:

Advanced > Boot Options > UEFI Boot Order > UEFI Hybrid Advanced > Boot Options > UEFI Boot Order > UEFI Native Boot mode Advanced > Boot Options > Legacy Boot Order > Legacy Boot Mode Press enter. 4. To move the device up in the boot order, use a pointing device to click the up arrow, or press the + key. or ENWW Using MultiBoot 75 To move the device down in the boot order, use a pointing device to click the down arrow, or press the -

key. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Dynamically choosing a boot device using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Open the Select Boot Device menu by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f9. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select a boot device, then press enter. Setting a MultiBoot Express prompt To start Computer Setup and set the computer to display the MultiBoot startup location menu each time the computer is started or restarted, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced > Boot Options > MultiBoot Express Boot Popup Delay (Sec), and then press enter. In the MultiBoot Express Popup Delay (Sec) field, enter the length of time in seconds that you want the computer to display the startup location menu before it defaults to the current MultiBoot setting.

(When 0 is selected, the Express Boot startup location menu is not displayed.) To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main > Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering MultiBoot Express preferences When the Express Boot menu is displayed during startup, you have the following choices:

76 Chapter 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ENWW To specify a boot device from the Express Boot menu, select your preference within the allotted time, and then press enter. To prevent the computer from defaulting to the current MultiBoot setting, press any key before the allotted time expires. The computer will not start until you select a boot device and press enter. To allow the computer to start according to the current MultiBoot settings, wait for the allotted time to expire. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 77. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 2. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE:

Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English only. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Go to http://www.hp.com. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. ENWW Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 77 78 Chapter 12 Computer Setup (BIOS), MultiBoot, and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ENWW 13 Support Contacting support If the information provided in this user guide or HP Support Assistant does not address your questions, you can contact support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Here you can:

Chat online with an HP technician. NOTE: When support chat is not available in a particular language, it is available in English. E-mail support. Find support telephone numbers. Locate an HP service center. ENWW Contacting support 79 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer:

IMPORTANT: All labels described in this section will be located in one of 3 places depending on your computer model: affixed to the bottom of the computer, located in the battery bay, or under the service door. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Serial number Product number Warranty period Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label (select models only prior to Windows 8)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. HP platforms preinstalled with Windows 8 or Windows 8.1 do not have the physical label, but have a Digital Product Key electronically installed. NOTE: This Digital Product Key is automatically recognized and activated by Microsoft Operating Systems on a reinstall of the Windows 8 or Windows 8.1 operating system with HP-approved recovery methods. Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 80 Chapter 13 Support ENWW 14 Specifications Input power Operating environment ENWW 81 Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage and current Rating 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. 82 Chapter 14 Specifications ENWW Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft ENWW Operating environment 83 84 Chapter 14 Specifications ENWW A Traveling with the computer For best results, follow these traveling and shipping tips:

Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove the media from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate on the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your bags. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device or an HP Mobile Broadband Module installed, such as an 802.11b/g device, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) device, or a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) device, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. ENWW 85 WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 86 Appendix A Traveling with the computer ENWW B Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources Access website links and additional information about the computer through HP Support Assistant. To access HP Support Assistant, from the Start screen, select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: Some checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection. HP also provides additional tools that do not require an Internet connection. Contact HP support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Choose from the following types of support:

Chat online with an HP technician. NOTE: When chat is not available in a particular language, it is available in English. Find HP support worldwide telephone numbers. Locate an HP service center. Resolving issues The following sections describe several common issues and solutions. The computer is unable to start up If the computer does not turn on when you press the power button, the following suggestions may help you determine why the computer does not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, plug another electrical device into the outlet to be sure that the outlet is providing adequate power. NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved by HP for this computer. If the computer is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank but you have not turned off the computer, one or more of these settings may be the cause:

ENWW Troubleshooting resources 87 The computer may be in the Sleep state. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. Sleep is an energy-saving feature that turns off the display. Sleep can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but is not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, right-click the Battery icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Preferences. The computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external displays, and simultaneous display on all devices. Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, restart the computer by pointing to the right side of the screen. When the charms display, click Settings. Click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, see the next section, The computer is on but not responding on page 88. The computer is on but not responding If the computer is turned on but is not responding to software or keyboard commands, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). NOTE: The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during operation. An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device according to the manufacturer's instructions. Be sure that all device connections are secure. 88 Appendix B Troubleshooting ENWW Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is older, is compatible with the operating system. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. The wireless network connection is not working If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

To enable or disable a wireless or wired network device, right-click the Network Connection icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. To enable devices, select the check box from the menu option. To disable the device, clear the check box. Be sure that the wireless device is turned on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennas are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and to the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. A disc does not play Save your work and close all open programs before playing a CD or a DVD. Log off the Internet before playing a CD or a DVD. Be sure that you insert the disc properly. Be sure that the disc is clean. If necessary, clean the disc with filtered water and a lint-free cloth. Wipe from the center of the disc to the outer edge. Check the disc for scratches. If you find scratches, treat the disc with an optical disc repair kit available at many electronics stores. Disable Sleep mode before playing the disc. Do not initiate Sleep while playing a disc. Otherwise, you may see a warning message asking if you want to continue. If this message is displayed, click No. After you click No, the computer may behave in either of the following ways:

Playback may resume. or The playback window in the multimedia program may close. To return to playing the disc, click the Play button in your multimedia program to restart the disc. In rare cases, you may need to exit the program and then restart it. ENWW Resolving issues 89 A movie is not visible on an external display 1. 2. If both the computer display and an external display are turned on, press fn+f4 one or more times to switch between the 2 displays. Configure the monitor settings to make the external display primary:

a. b. From the Windows desktop, right-click on a blank area of the computer desktop, and select Screen resolution. Specify a primary display and a secondary display. NOTE: When using both displays, the DVD image will not appear on any display designated as the secondary display. The process of burning a disc does not begin, or it stops before completion Be sure that all other programs are closed. Turn off Sleep mode. Be sure that you are using the right kind of disc for your drive. Be sure that the disc is inserted properly. Select a slower write speed and try again. If you are copying a disc, save the information on the source disc to your hard drive before trying to burn the contents to a new disc, and then burn from your hard drive. 90 Appendix B Troubleshooting ENWW C Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, unplug it after being properly grounded and before removing a cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, contact HP support. ENWW 91 92 Appendix C Electrostatic discharge ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics 2-finger pinch zoom TouchPad gesture 26 A AC adapter, testing 45 AC adapter/battery light 5 administrator password 56 airport security devices 51 antivirus software 62 audio functions, checking 34 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 6 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 6 Automatic DriveLock password entering 61 removing 61 B battery conserving power 44 discharging 43 displaying remaining charge 43 low battery levels 43 battery bay 80 Battery Check 43 battery information, finding 42 battery power 42 BIOS determining version 73 downloading an update 73 updating 73 Bluetooth device 15, 20 Bluetooth label 80 buttons left TouchPad 9 media 33 power 11, 39 right TouchPad 9 volume 33 C cables USB 49 caps lock light, identifying 10 caring for your computer 65 checking audio functions 34 cleaning your computer 65 components bottom 13 display 7 front 14 left side 6 right side 5 top 8 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 57 DriveLock password 58 navigating and selecting 71 restoring factory settings 72 computer, traveling 85 configuring audio for HDMI 37 connecting to a WLAN 18 connector, power 5 conservation, power 44 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 40 critical updates, software 63 D Disk Cleanup software 53 Disk Defragmenter software 52 display image, switching 30 drive media 40 DriveLock password changing 60 description 58 entering 60 removing 60 setting 59 drives external 50 handling 51 hard 50 optical 50 using 51 E electrostatic discharge 91 embedded numeric keypad, identifying 12, 31 esc key, identifying 12 external AC power, using 44 external devices 49 external drive 50 external monitor port 6, 35 F f11 recovery 68 Face Recognition 35 firewall software 62 fn key, identifying 12, 29 function keys, identifying 12 H hard drive external 50 HP 3D DriveGuard 53 hard drive light 14, 53 hard drive recovery 68 HDMI port, connecting 36 HDMI port, identifying 6 HDMI, configuring audio 37 headphone (audio-out) jack 6 ENWW Index 93 headphones and microphones, keypad Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity connecting 34 Help and Support hot key 29 Hibernation exiting 41 initiating 41 embedded numeric 12 identifying 31 keypad, external num lock 32 using 32 high-definition devices, connecting keys 36, 38 hot keys adjusting volume 30 decrease screen brightness 30 decreasing speaker sound 30 description 29 Help and Support 29 increase screen brightness 30 increasing speaker sound 30 keyboard backlight 30 muting speaker sound 30 Sleep 30 switching screen image 30 Touchpad 30 using 29 wireless 30 hot keys, media 33 HP 3D DriveGuard 53 HP Client Security 63 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 19 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) downloading 77 using 77 hubs 48 I input power 82 integrated webcam light, identifying 7 internal display switch 7 internal microphones, identifying 7 Internet connection setup 17 issues, resolving 87 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 6 audio-out (headphone) 6 network 5 RJ-45 (network) 5 K keyboard backlight 30 keyboard hot keys, identifying 29 esc 12 fn 12 function 12 media 33 volume 33 Windows key 12, 31 L labels Bluetooth 80 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 80 regulatory 80 serial number 80 wireless certification 80 WLAN 80 legacy support, USB 71 lights AC adapter/battery 5 caps lock 10 hard drive 14 power 10 RJ-45 (network) 5 TouchPad 10 webcam 7 wireless 8, 10 lights, hard drive 53 low battery level 43 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 53 Disk Defragmenter 52 media activity controls 33 media hot keys 33 memory card 40 inserting 47 removing 47 supported formats 47 memory card reader, identifying 5 microphone (audio-in) jack, identifying 6 label 80 Miracast 38 mouse, external setting preferences 24 mute key, identifying 30 N network jack, identifying 5 num lock, external keypad 32 O operating environment 83 optical drive 50 optional external devices, using 49 P passwords administrator 56 BIOS administrator 57 DriveLock 58 user 56 pointing devices, setting preferences 24 ports external monitor 6, 35 HDMI 6, 36 Miracast 38 VGA 35 power battery 42 conserving 44 options 40 power button 39 power button, identifying 11 power connector, identifying 5 power lights 10 power switch 39 power-saving states 40 product name and number, computer 80 public WLAN connection 18 R readable media 40 recovery 70 recovery partition 68 refresh 70 regulatory information regulatory label 80 wireless certification labels 80 94 Index ENWW wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 18 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 using 16 WLAN antennas, identifying 7 WLAN device 16, 80 WLAN label 80 writable media 40 WWAN antennas, identifying 7 WWAN device 15, 18 reset 70 restoring the hard drive 68 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 5 RJ-45 (network) lights, identifying 5 S screen brightness keys 30 screen image, switching 30 scrolling TouchPad gesture 26 security cable slot, identifying 6 security, wireless 17 serial number 80 serial number, computer 80 setting password protection on wakeup 41 setting power options 40 setup of WLAN 17 setup utility navigating and selecting 71 restoring factory settings 72 shutdown 39 SIM inserting 19 Sleep exiting 40 initiating 40 slots security cable 6 SoftPaqs, downloading 66 software antivirus 62 critical updates 63 Disk Cleanup 53 Disk Defragmenter 52 firewall 62 speakers, identifying 11 switch, power 39 T testing an AC adapter 45 TouchPad buttons 9 using 24 TouchPad gestures 2-finger pinch zoom 26 scrolling 26 TouchPad light, identifying 10 TouchPad zone identifying 9 traveling with the computer 80, 85 troubleshooting disc burning 90 disc play 89 troubleshooting, external display 90 turning off the computer 39 U unresponsive system 39 USB 3.0 port 5, 6 USB cable, connecting 49 USB devices connecting 49 description 48 removing 49 USB hubs 48 USB legacy support 71 USB ports, identifying 5, 6 user password 56 using external AC power 44 power-saving states 40 V vents, identifying 6, 13 VGA port, connecting 35 video 35 volume adjusting 33 buttons 33 keys 33 volume keys, identifying 30 W webcam 7, 35 webcam light, identifying 7 webcam, identifying 7 Windows Refresh 70 Reset 70 Windows key, identifying 12, 31 Windows operating system DVD 69 wireless antennas, identifying 7 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 80 wireless controls button 15 operating system 15 wireless key, identifying 30 wireless light 8, 10, 15 ENWW Index 95 96 Index ENWW

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To obtain the latest information in this guide, contact support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: February 2014 First Edition: February 2014 Document Part Number: 753647-002 Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Visit the HP Apps Store ........................................................................................................................ 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 3 2 Getting to know your computer ......................................................................................................................... 5 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 5 Locating hardware ............................................................................................................... 5 Locating software ................................................................................................................. 5 Right side ............................................................................................................................................. 6 Left side ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand .......................................................... 10 Changing your notebook to a tablet ................................................................................... 10 Top ..................................................................................................................................................... 11 TouchPad .......................................................................................................................... 11 Lights ................................................................................................................................. 12 Speakers ............................................................................................................................ 12 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 13 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 15 Using the wireless button .................................................................................. 15 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 16 Sharing data and drives and accessing software .............................................................. 16 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 16 Using an Internet service provider .................................................................... 17 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 17 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................ 17 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 18 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................ 18 Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) .......................................... 19 v Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 20 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) ......................................................................... 20 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................................................... 21 Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 21 Using the webcam .............................................................................................................................. 22 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 23 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 23 Connecting headphones and microphones ....................................................................... 23 Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 23 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 23 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .................................................................. 23 Testing your audio features ............................................................................................... 23 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable ........................................................... 24 Setting up HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 25 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays ............................. 25 5 Navigating the screen ..................................................................................................................................... 26 Using the TouchPad and gestures ..................................................................................................... 26 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 27 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 28 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 28 2-finger click ....................................................................................................................... 29 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 29 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 29 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Top-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Using touch screen gestures .............................................................................................................. 31 One-finger slide ................................................................................................................. 31 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 32 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 32 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 33 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 34 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 34 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 34 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe .......................................................... 35 Using the keyboard and mouse .......................................................................................................... 35 Using the keys ................................................................................................................... 35 Using the action keys ........................................................................................ 35 vi Using Windows shortcut keys ........................................................................... 36 Using the hot keys ............................................................................................. 37 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................. 38 Initiating Sleep and Hibernation ......................................................................................................... 38 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 39 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ....................................... 39 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 39 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................ 40 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 40 Factory-sealed battery ....................................................................................................... 40 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 40 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 40 Identifying low battery levels .............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ........................ 41 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................... 41 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....... 41 Running on external AC power .......................................................................................................... 41 Troubleshooting power problems ...................................................................................... 42 HP CoolSense .................................................................................................................................... 42 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .......... 43 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 43 7 Maintaining your computer .............................................................................................................................. 45 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 45 Using HP 3D DriveGuard ................................................................................................... 45 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ................................................................ 45 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 45 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 46 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................... 47 Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) .............................................. 47 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................... 47 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ................................................... 47 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 47 8 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................................................ 49 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 49 vii Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 50 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 50 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 50 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 51 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 51 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 51 Installing critical security updates ...................................................................................... 51 Installing HP and third-party software updates .................................................................. 51 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 52 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 52 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 52 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ............................................................ 53 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 53 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 53 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 53 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 54 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ...................................................................................... 54 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ............................... 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 56 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 56 Creating HP Recovery media ............................................................................................ 56 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 57 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 58 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 58 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 58 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 59 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 59 Removing the HP Recovery partition ................................................................................. 59 11 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 60 12 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................................................................. 61 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 62 viii 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the Start screen. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. 3. From the Start screen, select the Store app. Select HP Picks to view all the available apps. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices To get the most out of your smart investment, after you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Take a minute to browse the printed Windows Basics guide to explore the new Windows features. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 5 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 21. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 51. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Fun things to do You know that you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a TV or gaming console? For more information, see Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. You know that you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 23. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 You know that you can create a powerful presentation with Microsoft applications. But did you know you can also connect to a projector to share your ideas with a group? See Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. Experience music the way the artist intended, with deep controlled bass and clear, pure sound. See Using Beats Audio on page 23. Use the TouchPad and the new Windows touch gestures for smooth control of images and pages of text. See Using the TouchPad and gestures on page 26. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Overview of using Windows A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Email support Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including proper battery disposal information Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions Windows Basics guide Help and Support To access Help and Support, from the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Limited Warranty*

To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA More HP resources 3 Resource Contents Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. 4 Chapter 1 Starting right 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select System, and then click Device Manager in the left column. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. To find out information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc. Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

From the Start screen, click the down arrow in the lower-left corner of the screen. Finding your hardware and software information 5 Right side Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Hard drive light Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. NOTE: For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP 3D DriveGuard on page 45. SIM slot (select models only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM). Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. USB 2.0 port USB 3.0 port HDMI port RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable.

(8) AC adapter light White: The network is connected. Amber: Activity is occurring on the network. On: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Off: The computer is using battery power.

(9) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer.

(2) Power button NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. Power light

(3)

(4)

(5) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. USB 2.0 port NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Left side 7 Component

(6) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Description Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone).

(7) Volume button Controls speaker volume. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) WWAN antennas (2)* (select models only) Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWAN). Webcam light Webcam Internal microphone WLAN antenna*

Internal display switch On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Records sound. Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Turns off the display and initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The internal display switch is not visible from the outside of the computer.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Your computer can function as a classic notebook, and in addition, the display can be rotated so that the computer transforms into an entertainment stand or a tablet. Display 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand To change your notebook to an entertainment stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). Changing your notebook to a tablet To change your notebook to a tablet, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward until it is flush with the computer bottom (360 degrees). 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Description Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. For more information, see Edge swipes on page 29. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Top 11 Lights Component Description

(1)

(2) Caps lock light Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Speakers Component Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Labels esc key fn key Windows key Description Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the b key, the spacebar, or the esc key. Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Important system information is located on the bottom of the computer. The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Labels 13 Component

(1)

(2) Serial number Product number

(3) Warranty period

(4) Model number (select models only) Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth device (select models only)Creates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using the operating system controls. For more information, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button and one or more wireless devices, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless devices are on when you turn on the computer. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. 2. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Network computers can exchange software and data with each other. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. To share folders or content on the same network:

1. 2. From the Windows desktop, open File Explorer. From This PC, click a folder with content you want to share. Select Share from the navigation bar at the top of the window, and then click Specific people. Type a name in the File Sharing box, and then click Add. 3. 4. Click Share and then follow the on-screen instructions. To share drives on the same network:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Open Network and Sharing Center. 2. 3. Under View your active networks, select an active network. 4. Select Change advanced sharing settings to set sharing options for privacy, network discovery, file and printer sharing or other network options. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer when connected to a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Connecting to a wireless network 17 Use a firewall. A firewall checks information and requests that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is off, the airplane mode icon displays on the Windows desktop; press the wireless button to turn the WLAN device on. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Sign in to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 6. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP supports the following technologies:

18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. LTE (Long Term Evolution), which provides access to networks supporting LTE technology. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about inserting and removing the SIM, see the Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) on page 19 section in this chapter. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. Shut down the computer. To insert a SIM, follow these steps:

1. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and then gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. NOTE: The SIM in your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. 6. Reconnect external power. Connecting to a wireless network 19 7. Reconnect external devices. 8. To remove a SIM, press in on the SIM, and then remove it from the slot. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or TV, or speakers and headphones. Multimedia features Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Webcam light Webcam Description On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. From the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Internal microphone Records sound. HDMI port Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Multimedia features 21 Component Description

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10) USB 3.0 port USB 2.0 ports Memory card reader SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connect an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Supports a wireless subscriber identity module

(SIM). Speakers (2) Produce sound. Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-

conductor connector that supports both audio-out

(headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Using the webcam The computer has an integrated webcam that records video and captures photographs. Some models may allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To start the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Using audio On your computer, you can download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web

(including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 25. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones and microphones You can connect wired headphones or headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. Many headsets with integrated microphones are commercially available. To connect wireless headphones or headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. From Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. Testing your audio features To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. When the Sound window opens, select the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then click Test. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. Using audio 23 Save the file to your desktop. From the Start screen, type sound, and then select Sound Recorder. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. 3. 4. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Your computer has a high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, sold separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, adjust the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Swipe from the right edge of the Start screen, tap Devices, tap Project, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. or Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen to display the charms, click Devices, click Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using video 25 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Touch gestures Keyboard and mouse Touch gestures can be used on your computer TouchPad or on a touch screen. NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to one of the USB ports on the computer. Review the Windows Basics guide included with your computer. The guide provides information about common tasks using the TouchPad, touch screen, or the keyboard. Your computer model has special action keys or hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. Using the TouchPad and gestures The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen and control the pointer by using simple finger movements. You can customize the touch gestures by changing settings, button configurations, click speed, and pointer options. You can also view demonstrations of TouchPad gestures. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. TIP: Use the left and right buttons on the TouchPad as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function on the TouchPad. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Using the TouchPad and gestures 27 Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. 28 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger click 2-finger click allows you to make menu selections for an object on the screen. NOTE: Using 2-finger click is the same action as using right-click with the mouse. Place two fingers on the TouchPad zone and press down to open the options menu for the selected object. Edge swipes Edge swipes allow you to perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Swipe your finger gently from the right edge to reveal the charms. Using the TouchPad and gestures 29 Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Swipe your finger gently from the left edge of the TouchPad. Top-edge swipe The top-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is active, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your gently from the top edge to reveal the app command options. 30 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using touch screen gestures A touch screen computer allows you to control items on the screen directly with your fingers. TIP: On touch screen computers, you can perform the gestures on the screen or on the TouchPad. You can also perform on-screen actions with the keyboard and mouse. One-finger slide The one-finger slide is mostly used to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can use it for other interactions, too, such as moving an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. NOTE: When many apps are displayed on the Start screen, you can slide your finger to move the screen left or right. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. Using touch screen gestures 31 Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function. Use one finger to tap an object on the screen to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving the pointer up, down, left, or right on a page or image. Place two fingers on the screen and then drag them in an up, down, left, or right motion. 32 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the screen and then moving your fingers apart. Using touch screen gestures 33 Edge swipes With edge swipes you can perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the display onto the screen to reveal the charms. Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe reveals your open apps so that you can switch to them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the display to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. 34 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe The top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge to reveal the app command options. Using the keyboard and mouse The keyboard and mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the Start screen from TIP: The Windows key an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the keys You can quickly access information or perform functions by using certain keys and key combinations. Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f4 keys and the f6 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Using the keyboard and mouse 35 The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 53 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Using Windows shortcut keys Windows provides shortcuts so that you can perform actions quickly. Press the Windows key alone or in combination with a specific key to perform a designated action. For commonly used shortcuts, use the Windows Basics guide. 36 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and the esc key, the b key, or the spacebar. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. Using the keyboard and mouse 37 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports an optimal power plan to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that computer performance is balanced with power conservation. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity when running on battery power or on external power. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. NOTE: You can manually initiate Hibernation. See Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39 and Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 39. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. 38 Chapter 6 Managing power Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password before the computer will return to the screen. Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. 1. 2. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation 39 Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To reveal the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, on the Windows desktop, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. If the computer has a charged battery installed and the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer, the computer automatically switches to battery power and the screen brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in Help and Support. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. Do not attempt to remove or replace the factory-sealed battery. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If the battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in HP Support Assistant. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery test Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. 40 Chapter 6 Managing power Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the power meter icon on the Windows desktop shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE: For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power settings on page 40. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect an optional docking or expansion device. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on external AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

Running on external AC power 41 WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Shut down the computer. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. HP CoolSense HP CoolSense adjusts performance and fan settings to keep the surface temperature of your computer at the optimum level of comfort. automatically detects when the computer is not on a horizontal surface and 42 Chapter 6 Managing power When HP CoolSense is off, the position of the computer is not detected and the performance and fan options remain at the factory setting. As a result, the surface temperature of the computer might be higher than it would be with HP CoolSense on. To turn CoolSense off or on, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type coolsense, and then select HP CoolSense. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. If a network connection is available, Smart Connect updates open apps such as your email inboxes, social network sites, and news pages and then returns the computer to the Sleep state. Smart Connect also syncs content that you have created offline, such as emails. When the computer exits Sleep, you have immediate access to your updated information. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, from the Start screen, type smart, and then select Intel Smart Connect Technology. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command:

NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) 43 Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. 44 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for traveling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and you can drastically improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using HP 3D DriveGuard HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, they do not require HP 3D DriveGuard protection. NOTE: A hard drive in a primary hard drive bay or a secondary hard drive bay is protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether the drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, or in the Mobility Center. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. Improving performance 45 HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. From the Start screen, type disk. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands). Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. 46 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards, from the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. Traveling with or shipping your computer 47 When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 48 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Security feature Power-on password Antivirus software Firewall software Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Unauthorized removal of the computer Software updates User password Security cable lock Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using passwords 49 Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. NOTE:

password check, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you enter the power-on password at the first Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade 50 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 46. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can choose whether updates are installed automatically. To change the settings, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Installing software updates 51 If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 17. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, which is purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 5. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 52 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main, and then make note of your current BIOS version. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 53). To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Select Yes. 4. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 53 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. From the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. 54 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 55. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 2. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English NOTE:

only. 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. 3. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click the Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 4. 5. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system Creating recovery media and backups 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. HP Recovery media you create will provide the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system and the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. See Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. 2. Use the Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Creating HP Recovery media HP Recovery Manager is a software program that offers a way to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory, and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of HP Recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the blank USB flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or instead you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased 56 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you want to recover the computer's original factory partitioning and content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media that you have created. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media to restore the factory image to the replacement drive. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you wish to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. Restore and recovery 57 For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition on page 59. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you created or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you wish to retain. Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

1. Press f11 while the computer boots. or 58 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media that you created, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 59. Follow the on-screen instructions. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the 3. Changing the computer boot order If computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Insert the HP Recovery media you created. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive you want to boot from. Follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option or the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows. In addition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or Minimized Image Recovery from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 59 11 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 60 Chapter 11 Specifications 12 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded, and then remove the cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 61 Index Symbols/Numerics 2-finger pinch zoom TouchPad gesture 28 2-finger pinch zoom touchPad gesture 33 A AC adapter 6 AC adapter, testing 42 action keys decrease screen brightness 36 Help and Support 36 identifying 13 increase screen brightness 36 play, pause, resume 36 previous track or section 36 switch screen image 36 volume down 36 volume mute 36 volume up 36 wireless 36 antivirus software, using 51 audio features, testing 23 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack 8, 22 B backing up software and information 52 backups 56 battery discharging 40 low battery levels 41 battery information, finding 40 battery power 40 Beats Audio 23 Beats Audio Control Panel 23 Beats Audio hot key 23 BIOS determining version 53 downloading an update 54 updating 53 Bluetooth device 15, 20 Bluetooth label 14 62 Index boot order, changing 59 bottom 14 buttons left TouchPad 11 power 7 right TouchPad 11 C caps lock light, identifying 12 caring for your computer 46 cleaning your computer 46 components display 9 left side 7 right side 6 top 11 connecting to a WLAN 18 connector, power 6 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 41 critical security updates, installing 51 D deleted files restoring 57 Disk Cleanup software 46 Disk Defragmenter software 45 E edge-swipe gestures 29, 34 bottom-edge swipe 35 top-edge swipe 35 electrostatic discharge 61 esc key, identifying 13 external AC power, using 41 F firewall software 51 fn key, identifying 13, 37 fun things to do 1 H hard drive HP 3D DriveGuard 45 hard drive light 6 HDMI configuring audio 25 HDMI port connecting 24 identifying 6, 21 headphones and microphones, connecting 23 Hibernation exiting 39 initiated during critical battery level 41 initiating 39 high-definition devices, connecting 24, 25 hot keys description 37 using 37 HP 3D DriveGuard 45 HP and third-party software updates, installing 51 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 19 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 55 using 54 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 59 starting 58 HP Recovery media creating 56 recovery 59 HP Recovery partition recovery 58 removing 59 I input power 60 installing critical security updates 51 optional security cable lock 52 internal display switch, identifying 9 internal microphone, identifying 9, 21 Internet connection setup 17 Internet security software, using 50 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 8, 22 network 6 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hot keys, identifying 37 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 LAN, connecting 20 left-edge swipe 30, 34 lights AC adapter 6 caps lock 12 hard drive 6 mute 12 power 7 RJ-45 (network) status 6 low battery level 41 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 memory card inserting 6 removing 6 memory card reader, identifying 6, 22 minimized image recovery 58 minimized image, creating 58 Miracast 25 mouse, external setting preferences 26 mute light, identifying 12 N network jack, identifying 6 O operating environment 60 original system recovery 58 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 50 Windows 50 ports HDMI 6, 21, 24 Miracast 25 USB 2.0 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 6, 22 power battery 40 power button, identifying 7 power connector, identifying 6 power lights, identifying 7 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 18 R recovery discs 56, 59 HP Recovery Manager 58 media 59 options 57 starting 58 supported discs 56 system 58 USB flash drive 59 using HP Recovery media 57 recovery media creating 56 creating using HP Recovery Manager 57 recovery partition removing 59 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 restore Windows File History 57 right-edge swipe 29, 34 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 RJ-45 (network) status lights, identifying 6 S scrolling TouchPad gesture 28 security cable lock, installing 52 security cable slot, identifying 7 security, wireless 17 serial number 13 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 setting password protection on wakeup 39 setup of WLAN 17 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 50 shipping the computer 47 shutdown 43 SIM inserting 19 removing 19 SIM slot, identifying 6, 22 Sleep exiting 39 initiating 39 slots memory card reader 6, 22 security cable 7 SIM 6, 22 software Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 software updates, installing 51 speakers connecting 23 identifying 12, 22 supported discs, recovery 56 system recovery 58 system restore point creating 56 T tapping TouchPad gesture 27 testing an AC adapter 42 testing audio features 23 Index 63 operating system 15 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 18 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 using 16 wireless network, securing 52 WLAN antenna, identifying 9 WLAN device 14, 16 WLAN label 14 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN device 18 top-edge swipe 30 touch screen gestures 34 2-finger pinch zoom 33 bottom-edge swipe 35 edge-swipe gestures 34, 35 one-finger slide 31 scrolling 32 tapping 32 top-edge swipe 35 touch screen, using 31 TouchPad buttons 11 TouchPad gestures 2-finger pinch zoom 28 scrolling 28 tapping 27 TouchPad zone, identifying 11 traveling with the computer 14, 47 turning off the computer 43 U unresponsive system 43 USB 2.0 ports, identifying 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 ports, identifying 6, 22 using external AC power 41 using passwords 49 V vents, identifying 7 video 24 volume button 8 W webcam identifying 9, 21 using 22 webcam light, identifying 9, 21 Windows File History 57 restoring files 57 system restore point 56 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows passwords 50 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 64 Index

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund, subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2014 Document Part Number: 795063-xx1 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select models only) IMPORTANT: Select computer models are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select models only) Table of contents 1 Starting right ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Visit the HP Apps Store ........................................................................................................................ 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ......................................................................................................................... 4 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................ 4 Locating software ................................................................................................................................. 4 Identifying components ........................................................................................................................ 5 Using the action keys ......................................................................................................................... 11 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 12 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................................................. 14 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 14 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 14 Wireless button ................................................................................................. 14 Operating system controls ................................................................................ 15 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 15 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................ 16 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 16 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select models only) ............................................................... 16 Sharing data and drives and accessing software ............................................................................... 17 Sharing media and data across your home group network (select models only) ............................... 17 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................................................... 19 Using a webcam (select models only) ................................................................................................ 19 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 19 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 19 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................... 19 Connecting a microphone .................................................................................................. 20 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................... 20 Using Beats Audio (select models only) ............................................................................ 20 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 20 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .................................................................. 20 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 20 Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select models only) ............................. 21 vii Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select models only) .............................. 21 Setting up HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 22 Connecting digital display devices using a DisplayPort cable (select models only) .......... 23 Connecting Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select models only) .......................... 23 5 Navigating the screen ..................................................................................................................................... 24 Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures ............................................................................... 24 Tap ..................................................................................................................................... 24 Two-finger scroll ................................................................................................................ 24 Two-finger pinch zoom ...................................................................................................... 25 Two-finger click .................................................................................................................. 25 Right-edge swipe ............................................................................................................... 25 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................................. 26 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe ........................................................................... 26 One-finger slide (touch screen only) .................................................................................. 26 Using a keyboard and optional mouse ............................................................................................... 27 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................. 28 Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation ....................................................................................... 28 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 29 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ....................................... 29 Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) ............................ 29 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................ 30 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 30 Factory-sealed battery (select models only) ...................................................................... 30 User-replaceable battery (select models only) .................................................................. 31 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 31 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 32 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................. 32 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ........................ 32 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................... 32 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....... 32 Storing a user-replaceable battery (select models only) .................................................... 32 Disposing of a user-replaceable battery (select models only) ........................................... 33 Running on AC power ........................................................................................................................ 33 Troubleshooting power problems ...................................................................................... 33 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 34 7 Maintaining your computer .............................................................................................................................. 36 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 36 viii Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 36 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 36 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 36 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 37 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................... 37 Cleaning the display .......................................................................................... 37 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................... 38 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select models only) .................. 38 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 38 8 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................................................ 40 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 40 Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 40 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 41 Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) ............................................................................... 41 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 42 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 42 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 42 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 43 Installing critical security updates ....................................................................................................... 43 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 43 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 43 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 43 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................... 45 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 45 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 45 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 45 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 46 Synchronizing a tablet and keyboard (select models only) ................................................................ 47 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ................................................................................................. 48 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ................................................ 48 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 50 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 50 Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) ........................................................... 50 Using Windows tools .......................................................................................................................... 51 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 51 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 52 ix What you need to know before you get started ................................................. 52 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 53 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 53 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 54 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ............................... 54 12 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 55 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 55 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 55 13 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................................................................. 57 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 58 x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and about where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the Start screen. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. From the Start screen, select the Store app. Select HP picks to view all the available apps. NOTE: HP picks is available in select countries only. 3. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 50. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 14. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 4 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 19. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 42. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions Help and Support To access Help and Support:

From the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select My computer, and then select User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select My computer, and then select User guides. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Contents Overview of computer setup and features A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal Specific warranty information about this computer 2 Chapter 1 Starting right Resource Contents From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. More HP resources 3 2 Getting to know your computer Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select System, and then click Device Manager in the left column. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. 2. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn

+esc (select models only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

From the Start screen, click the down arrow in the lower-left corner of the screen. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Programs and Features. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Identifying components Depending on the model, your computer may have some of the following components. To see which components are specific to your model, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. Component Description AC adapter light On: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Off: The computer is using battery power. or White: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 90 to 99 percent. Amber: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 0 to 90 percent. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged. Accessory battery connector Connects an optional accessory battery. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Airplane mode key (also referred to as the wireless button) NOTE: On select models, the f5 action key turns the radiance backlight keyboard (also known as keyboard backlight) feature off or on. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Audio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Audio-out (headphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: When a device is connected to a headphone jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Identifying components 5 Component Description Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Battery bay Battery lock Holds the battery. Locks the battery in the battery bay. Battery release latch Releases the battery. Bluetooth compartment Contains a Bluetooth device. Caps lock light DisplayPort On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Connects an optional digital display device, such as a high-

performance monitor or projector. Docking connector Connects an optional docking device. esc key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Fingerprint reader fn key Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the esc key, or on select models, the b key or the spacebar. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description Hard drive light HDMI port Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. HP Triple Bass Reflex Subwoofer Provides superior bass sound. Integrated numeric keypad Internal display switch Internal microphones Left control zone Left TouchPad button Memory card reader Mute light num lock key Optical drive Power button When num lock is on, it can be used like an external numeric keypad. Turns off the display and initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The internal display switch is not visible from the outside of the computer. Record sound. Textured area that allows you to perform additional gestures. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Alternates between the navigational and numeric functions on the integrated numeric keypad. Depending on your computer model, reads an optical disc or reads and writes to an optical disc. NOTE: For disc compatibility information, go to the Help and Support web page (see More HP resources on page 2). Follow the web page instructions to select your computer model. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. Identifying components 7 Component Description When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Power Options. Connects an AC adapter. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. Textured area that allows you to perform additional gestures. Power connector Power light Right control zone Right TouchPad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse. RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable. White: The network is connected. Amber: Activity is occurring on the network. Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. Service door NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Provides access to the hard drive bay, the wireless local area network (WLAN) module slot, the wireless wide area network (WWAN) module slot, and the memory module slots. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact support through Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support.

- or -

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Service door release latch Releases the service door. SIM slot Speakers TouchPad light TouchPad zone USB 2.0 charging (powered) port USB 2.0 port USB 3.0 charging (powered) port USB 3.0 port Vents Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Produce sound. On: The TouchPad is off. Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Enable airflow to cool internal components. Identifying components 9 Component Description Webcam NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. The number of vents varies depending on the computer model. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam:

From the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. or From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, click All Programs to find your webcam software. Webcam light On: The webcam is in use. Windows application key Displays options for a selected object. Windows key Wireless light WLAN antennas WWAN antennas Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a WLAN device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with WLANs. NOTE: The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with WWANs. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description NOTE: The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using the action keys Depending on the model, your computer may have the function key features as described in this table. An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the action keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility

(BIOS). Refer to Help and Support for additional information. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Icon Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Turns the radiance backlight keyboard (also known as keyboard backlight) feature off or on. NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Using the action keys 11 Icon Description Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the removable service door, or on the back of the display. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component

(1)

(2) Serial number Product number

(3) Warranty period

(4) Model number (select models only) Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label (select models only prior to Windows 8)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. HP platforms with Windows 8 or Windows 8.x preinstalled do not have the physical label. Instead a Digital Product Key is electronically installed. NOTE: The Digital Product Key is automatically recognized and activated by Microsoft operating systems when a Windows 8 or Windows 8.x operating system is reinstalled using HP-

approved recovery methods. Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Labels 13 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network (WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, the Internet, and networking, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Wireless button or wireless key (also called the airplane mode key) (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and, on select models, one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. If your computer has a wireless light, the wireless light is on (white) when your computer is on. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. 14 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off all the wireless devices simultaneously. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. 2. For more information, see the information provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On select models, if the device is on, the wireless light is white. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 2. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the display to reveal the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 6. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. Connecting to a wireless network 15 NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. When used with a mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service.The serial number is printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband documents included with your computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. External keyboard Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select models only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Computers connected to the network can exchange software and data with each other. For more information about sharing files, folders, or drives, see the information provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. Sharing media and data across your home group network

(select models only) Use sMedio 360 software (select models only) to share media and data between the devices on your home group network. Before you can use sMedio 360, all of your computers and mobile devices must be on the same home group network and media sharing must be enabled. NOTE: For details on how to enable media sharing on additional devices, refer to the device manufacturer's instructions. 1. To set up a home group network:

From the Start screen, click the sMedio 360 app, and then click Tutorial. To enable media sharing on your computer:

2. Sharing data and drives and accessing software 17 a. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the display to reveal the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. b. c. Right-click the network you are connected to, and then select the check box to turn on sharing. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or TV, or speakers and headphones. Using a webcam (select models only) The computer has an integrated webcam that records video and captures photographs. Some models may allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To start the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using audio On your computer, or on select models using an external optical drive, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-

out (headphone) jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 22. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using a webcam (select models only) 19 Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a microphone to the microphone jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using Beats Audio (select models only) Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. 1. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. 2. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to Help and Support. 20 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select models only) NOTE: To connect a VGA video device to your computer, you need an VGA cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. 1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

PC Screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select models only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. Using video 21 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting digital display devices using a DisplayPort cable (select models only) NOTE: To connect a digital display device to your computer, you need a DisplayPort (DP-DP) cable, purchased separately. The DisplayPort connects a digital display device such as a high-performance monitor or projector. The DisplayPort delivers higher performance than the VGA external monitor port and improves digital connectivity. 1. Connect one end of the DisplayPort cable to the DisplayPort on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the digital display device. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the same screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Connecting Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select models only) To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen or the Windows desktop to display the charms, click Devices, click Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or On select computer models, from the Start screen, click the HP Quick Access to Miracast icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using video 23 5 Navigating the screen To quickly return to the Start screen, press the Windows key on a keyboard or the Windows button on a tablet. You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Touch gestures Keyboard and optional mouse (purchased separately) NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to a USB ports on the computer. Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. To navigate the touchscreen, you can use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Most of the gestures shown here can be used on either the TouchPad or touchscreen. TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone select it. Double-

tap an item to open it. Two-finger scroll Use the two-finger scroll gesture to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 24 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger click Use the two-finger click gesture to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger click performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Place two fingers on the TouchPad zone and press down to open the options menu for the selected object. Right-edge swipe Use the right-edge swipe to reveal the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the TouchPad to reveal the charms. Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures 25 Left-edge swipe Use the left-edge swipe to reveal your open apps so that you can access them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the TouchPad to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe Use the top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe to display command options that allow you to customize an open app. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge swipe varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge to reveal the app command options. One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using a keyboard and optional mouse A keyboard and optional external mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll, and perform similar functions as you do touch gestures. For details, refer to Getting to know your computer on page 4. TIP: The Windows key on a tablet allow you to quickly return to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. Press the button or key again to return to the previous screen. on a keyboard or the Windows button Using a keyboard and optional mouse 27 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 29. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 29. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate the Sleep state while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in the Hibernation state. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. From the Start screen, type power options, and then select Power options. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then click Power Options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

Windows password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. From the Start screen, type power options, and then select Power options. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then click Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 2. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation 29 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, place the mouse pointer over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer will display a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery (select models only) To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app. 1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. 2. The battery(ies) in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by user themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power User-replaceable battery (select models only) WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the user-replaceable battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. CAUTION: Removing a user-replaceable battery that is the sole power source for the computer can cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To remove the user-replaceable battery (select models only), refer to the steps and illustration that most closely match your computer:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. NOTE: The battery release latch automatically returns to its original position. 3. Remove the battery from the computer (2). or 1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. NOTE: The battery release latch automatically returns to its original position. 3. Pivot the battery upward (2), and then remove it from the computer (3). Finding battery information To access battery information:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Battery and Performance. 2. Running on battery power 31 HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. If the computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the user-replaceable battery from the computer and store it separately in a cool, dry place. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

AC adapter Optional docking or expansion device Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. Replace the discharged user-replaceable battery with a charged battery, or connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 2. Storing a user-replaceable battery (select models only) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately in a cool, dry place to prolong the battery charge. A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. 32 Chapter 6 Managing power Disposing of a user-replaceable battery (select models only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. See the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for proper battery disposal. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Running on AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect AC power:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

Running on AC power 33 The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights do not turn on. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Shut down the computer. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by NOTE:

briefly pressing the power button. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down or sign out, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

34 Chapter 6 Managing power Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. On models with a user-replaceable battery, remove the battery. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 35 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with

(or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. 2. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. From the Start screen, type defragment, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select one of the following:

Free up disk space on this PC Uninstall apps to free up disk space Free up disk space by deleting uncessary files Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. 36 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

-or-

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands) Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. Turn off the computer. 1. 2. Disconnect AC power. 3. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning your computer 37 Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select models only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

38 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 39 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

-or-

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. 40 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE:

these steps. 1. If your tablet has a keyboard base, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before beginning Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select computer models. NOTE: For the location of the fingerprint reader on your computer, see Identifying components on page 5. To use the fingerprint reader, you must set up a user account and password on the computer and then register one or more fingerprints using HP SimplePass software. To register fingerprints with HP SimplePass:

1. Swipe a finger on the fingerprint sensor to launch HP SimplePass. or Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) 41 From the Start screen, type simple, and then select HP SimplePass. 2. When the HP SimplePass welcome screen is revealed, click Get Started. 3. HP SimplePass prompts you to swipe your right index finger over the sensor. 4. Swipe your finger 3 times to finish the registration. If registration is successful, a green circle appears on the corresponding finger in the illustration. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to register an additional fingerprint. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app, or from the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 42 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 36. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates manually or automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. From the Start screen, type control panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 50. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 4. 1. 2. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Installing software updates 43 3. Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 44 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE:

the steps in this chapter. If your tablet has a keyboard base, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before beginning Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. Tap f10. 2. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than the one currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS that is installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed from the Start screen by typing support, selecting the HP Support Assistant app, and then selecting System Information, or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 45). Select Main, and then make note of your BIOS version. Select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 45 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. 1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select File Explorer. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 46 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Synchronizing a tablet and keyboard (select models only) When you attach a tablet to the keyboard and restart the computer, the BIOS checks to see if the Embedded Controller firmware on the keyboard needs to be synchronized. If so, BIOS will start the synchronization. If the synchronization is interrupted, a notification screen displays for 10 seconds before the tablet restarts and attempts to synchronize again. NOTE: The Embedded Controller firmware will synchronize ONLY if the tablet or keyboard battery is more than 50% charged, or if your tablet is connected to AC power. Synchronizing a tablet and keyboard (select models only) 47 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI):

1. Start Setup Utility:

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Press or tap f2. The BIOS searches 3 places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 48. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press or tap esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English NOTE:

only. There are two options to download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device:

Option 1: HP PC Diagnostics homepage Provides access to the latest UEFI version 1. Go to http://hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. 2. Click the UEFI Download link, and then select Run. 48 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Option 2: Support and Drivers pagesProvide downloads for a specific product for earlier and later versions 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. 3. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 4. 5. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device 49 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes. The information in the chapter is standard procedure for most models. Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system For additional information, refer to the HP Support Assistant. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

- or -

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Creating recovery media and backups The following methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select models only. Choose the available method according to your computer model. Use HP Recovery Manager after you successfully set up the computer to create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. For information on creating recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. For information on the recovery options that are available using the recovery media, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. Use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information, see Using Windows tools on page 51. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) If your computer does not list a Recovery Media Creation option, you can obtain IMPORTANT:

recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. HP Recovery Manager is a software program that allows you to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the media that will be required. 50 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or, instead, you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

IMPORTANT: For tablets with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using Windows tools You can create system restore points and create backups of personal information using Windows tools. If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. NOTE:

From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all models. Using Windows tools 51 Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

- or -

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. On select models, if you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. If you want to recover the Windows partition to original factory content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media

(select models only) on page 50. On select models, if you want to recover the computer's original factory partition and content , or if you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. On select models, if you want to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) on page 54. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from support, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. What you need to know before you get started HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. 52 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering To use the Factory Reset option (select models only), you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you want to retain. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

NOTE: Only the options available for your computer display when you start the recovery process. System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery (select models only). Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery

(select models only) without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT: For tablets with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. From the Start screen, type recovery, select Recovery Manager, and then select HP Recovery Environment.

- or-

Press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. Restore and recovery 53 1. 2. 3. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 54. Follow the on-screen instructions. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT: For tablets with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Start Computer Setup:

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For computers or tablets without keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press the volume down button, and then tap f9 for boot options.

- or -

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press the Windows button, and then tap f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot. Follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option or the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows. In addition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or Minimized Image Recovery from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 54 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19 V @ 2.1 A - 40 W 19.5 V @ 2.31 A - 45 W 19.5 V @ 3.33 A - 65 W 19.5 V @ 4.62 A - 90 W 19.5 V @ 6.15 A - 120 W 19.5 V @ 7.69 A - 150 W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Input power 55 Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 56 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 57 Index A AC adapter light, identifying 5 AC adapter, testing 33 accessory battery connector, identifying 5 action keys 11 identifying 5 airplane mode key 5, 12 antivirus software, using 42 audio-in (microphone), identifying 5 audio-out (headphone), identifying 5 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack, identifying 6 B backing up software and information 43 backups 50 battery conserving power 32 discharging 32 disposing 33 factory-sealed 30 finding information 31 resolving low battery level 32 storing 32 user-replaceable 31 battery bay, identifying 6 battery information, finding 31 battery lock, identifying 6 battery power 30 battery release latch, identifying 6 battery temperature 32 bay, battery 6 Beats Audio 20 Beats Audio Control Panel 20 Beats Audio hot key 20 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 45 downloading an update 46 58 Index starting the Setup Utility 45 updating 45 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 6 Bluetooth device 14, 16 Bluetooth label 13 boot order changing 54 bottom 13 buttons left TouchPad 7 power 7 right TouchPad 8 C caps lock light, identifying 6 caring for your computer 37 cleaning your computer 37 components 5 computer, traveling 32 connecting to a WLAN 15 connector, power 8 control zone left 7 right 8 corporate WLAN connection 15 critical security updates, installing 43 D Disk Cleanup software 36 Disk Defragmenter software 36 DisplayPort connecting 23 identifying 6 docking connector, identifying 6 E electrostatic discharge 57 esc key, identifying 6 external AC power, using 33 external monitor port 21 external monitor port, identifying 6 F fingerprint reader identifying 6 using 41 fingerprints, registering 41 firewall software 42 fn key, identifying 6 G getting to know your computer 4 H hard drive light, identifying 7 HDMI port connecting 21 identifying 7 HDMI, configuring audio 22 headphones, connecting 19 headsets, connecting 20 Hibernation exiting 29 initiating 29 high-definition devices, connecting 21, 23 HP Apps Store, visiting 1 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 48 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 54 starting 53 HP Recovery media creating 50 recovery 53 HP Recovery partition recovery 53 removing 54 HP resources 2 HP Triple Bass Reflex Subwoofer, identifying 7 I initiating Sleep and Hibernation 28 input power 55 installing critical security updates 43 optional security cable lock 43 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphones, identifying 7 Internet security software, using 42 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5 audio-out (headphone) 5 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 6 network 8 RJ-45 (network) 8 K keyboard and mouse, using 27 keys action 5 airplane mode 5, 12 esc 6 fn 6 num lock 7 Windows 10 Windows applications 10 L labels Bluetooth 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 13 regulatory 13 serial number 12 service 12 wireless certification 13 WLAN 13 latches battery release 6 service door release 9 left control zone, identifying 7 left-edge swipe TouchPad and touch screen gesture 26 lights AC adapter 5 caps lock 6 hard drive 7 mute 7 power 8 RJ-45 (network) status 8 TouchPad 9 webcam 10 wireless 10 locating information hardware 4 software 4 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 updating programs and drivers 36 memory card reader, identifying 7 memory card, identifying 7 microphone, connecting 20 minimized image recovery 53 minimized image, creating 52 Miracast 23 mouse, external setting preferences 24 mute light, identifying 7 N network jack, identifying 8 num lock key, identifying 7 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 26 operating environment 55 optical drive, identifying 7 original system recovery 52 P passwords ports Setup Utility (BIOS) 41 Windows 40 DisplayPort 6 external monitor 6, 21 HDMI 7, 21, 23 Miracast 23 USB 2.0 9 USB 2.0 charging (powered) 9 USB 3.0 9 USB 3.0 (powered) charging 9 VGA 21 power AC 33 battery 30 power button identifying 7 power connector, identifying 8 power lights, identifying 8 power meter, using 30 power settings, using 30 product name and number, computer 12 public WLAN connection 15 R recover options 51 recovery discs 51, 53 HP Recovery Manager 52 media 53 starting 53 supported discs 51 system 52 USB flash drive 53 using HP Recovery media 51 recovery media creating 50 creating using HP Recovery Manager 51 recovery partition removing 54 regulatory information regulatory label 13 wireless certification labels 13 right control zone, identifying 8 right-edge swipe TouchPad and touch screen gesture 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 8 RJ-45 (network) status lights, identifying 8 S security cable lock, installing 43 security cable slot, identifying 8 serial number 12 Index 59 serial number, computer 12 service door release latch 9 service door, identifying 8 service labels, locating 12 setting password protection on wakeup 29 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 41 sharing media 17 shipping the computer 38 shutdown 34 SIM slot, identifying 9 Sleep exiting 29 initiating 29 Sleep and Hibernation initiating 28 slots memory card reader 7 security cable 8 SIM 9 software Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 software updates, installing 43 speakers connecting 19 identifying 9 Starting right 1 storing a battery 32 supported discs, recovery 51 system recovery 52 system restore point creating 51 system restore point, creating 50 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 24 temperature 32 testing an AC adapter 33 top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe TouchPad and touch screen gesture 26 touch screen gesture, one-finger slide 26 TouchPad using 24 60 Index Windows applications key, identifying 10 Windows key, identifying 10 Windows passwords 40 Windows tools using 51 Wireless Assistant software 14 wireless button 14 wireless certification label 13 wireless controls button 14 operating system 14 Wireless Assistant software 14 wireless light 10, 14 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 15 corporate WLAN connection 15 functional range 16 public WLAN connection 15 wireless network, securing 43 WLAN antennas, identifying 10 WLAN device 13 WLAN label 13 WWAN antennas, identifying 10 WWAN device 16 TouchPad and touch screen gestures left-edge swipe 26 right-edge swipe 25 tap 24 top-edge swipe and bottom-

edge swipe 26 two-finger click 25 two-finger pinch/zoom 25 two-finger scroll 24 TouchPad light, identifying 9 TouchPad zone, identifying 9 TouchPad, buttons 7, 8 traveling with the computer 13, 32, 38 turning off the computer 34 two-finger click TouchPad and touch screen gesture 25 two-finger pinch/zoom TouchPad and touch screen gesture 25 two-finger scroll TouchPad and touch screen gesture 24 U unresponsive system 34 updating programs and drivers 36 USB 2.0 charging (powered) port, identifying 9 USB 2.0 port, identifying 9 USB 3.0 charging (powered) port, identifying 9 USB 3.0 port, identifying 9 using a keyboard and mouse 27 using external AC power 33 using passwords 40 using the TouchPad 24 V vents, identifying 9 VGA port, connecting 21 video 20 W webcam identifying 10 using 19 webcam light, identifying 10 Windows system restore point 50, 51

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2012, 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Ninth Edition: December 2013 First Edition: March 2012 Document Part Number: 689409-009 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers ..................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................................... 4 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) .......................................................... 5 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality .............................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ..................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................... 5 Germany (English text) ....................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ........................................................................................................ 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................. 7 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 8 Taiwan NCC notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 8 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............................... 8 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................... 9 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................. 9 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 9 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 10 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 10 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 10 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 11 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 12 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 13 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 13 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 13 Voice support .................................................................................................... 14 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 14 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 14 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 14 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 14 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ........................................................ 15 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 15 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 15 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 16 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 17 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 17 Voice support .................................................................................................... 17 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ................................................................................................ 18 Federal Communications Commission notice ................................................................... 18 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 18 Cables ............................................................................................................... 18 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ....................................................................................................... 19 Products with wireless LAN devices ................................................................. 19 Australia telecom statement .............................................................................................. 19 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................... 20 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................. 20 European Union regulatory notices ................................................................................... 20 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................. 20 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ....................................... 21 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ........................... 21 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................... 21 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................ 21 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................... 22 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings .......................................... 22 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................... 22 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................... 23 Taiwan NCC notices .......................................................................................................... 23 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ......................................................................... 23 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............. 23 vi 3 Safety notices for notebook computers .......................................................................................................... 24 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 24 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 24 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 24 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 25 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 25 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................... 25 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 25 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 25 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 26 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 26 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 26 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 26 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................................... 27 Important safety information ............................................................................................................... 27 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................... 27 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................. 28 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 28 Laser safety ........................................................................................................................................ 29 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................ 29 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................... 29 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................... 29 Denmark ............................................................................................................ 29 Finland .............................................................................................................. 29 Norway .............................................................................................................. 29 Sweden ............................................................................................................. 29 Power supply requirements ............................................................................................... 29 For use in Norway ............................................................................................. 30 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................. 30 Japan power cord requirements ........................................................................................ 30 Pinch hazard ...................................................................................................................................... 30 TV antenna connectors protection ..................................................................................................... 31 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................... 31 Lightning protection ........................................................................................................... 31 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................... 32 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 32 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 32 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 33 Germany acoustics notice .................................................................................................................. 33 vii 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers .............................................................................................. 34 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................... 34 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 34 Brazil battery disposal ........................................................................................................................ 34 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices .............................................................................................................. 35 China PC energy label ....................................................................................................................... 35 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 38 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................. 41 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 41 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 41 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 41 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................ 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations .................................................. 42 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................... 42 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 42 Brazil battery disposal ........................................................................................................................ 42 ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) .......................................................................... 43 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 44 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................. 44 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply .............................................................................. 44 China PC energy label ....................................................................................................................... 44 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 47 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 48 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................. 49 IT ECO declarations ........................................................................................................................... 49 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 49 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) ............................................................................................................................................ 49 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 50

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)) ........................................................................................................................... 50 TCO Certified Edge Certification ........................................................................................................ 51 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 52 viii 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. For Windows 7, to view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (such as Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. 2. 3. For Windows 8, follow these instructions:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC;

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions, but a minimum distance of 1 cm should be maintained from the antennas. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) European Union regulatory notices 5 Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Japan notices 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. South Korea notices 7 This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after <= 15 minutes (varies by model) Initiate Sleep after <= 30 minutes (varies by model) The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Airline travel notice 9 Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Modem notices 11 U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Modem notices 13 Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Modem notices 15 The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Modem notices 17 Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC;

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product may incorporate a radio transmitting and receiving device. For desktop computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. South Korea notices 20cm

. 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and personnel. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Electromagnetic compatibility notices 23 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 24 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded

(earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Headset and earphone volume level notice 25 China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. 26 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded

(earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. CAUTION:

system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. Important safety information 27 WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-

Packard authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts Laser safety 29 AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-

bin/hpsupport/index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. 2. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire TV antenna connectors protection 31 Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Germany acoustics notice 33 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Brazil battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 This product and its electronics components must not be discarded with your household waste. Although the product components were manufactured in accordance with world standards restricting harmful substances, the product may contain, even in minute quantities, substances impacting the environment. At the end of the useful life of this product, you should return the product to HP. Failure to follow this guidance will subject the violator to the penalties provided by law. When a battery used in the HP product has reached the end of its useful life, you should return the battery either to HP or to the company commissioned by HP for technical support. Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP 34 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/

reciclar Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers (CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A Category B Category C TEC (kilowatt hour) Grade 1 98.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa Grade 2 148.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 209.0+Efa Grade 3 198.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Chemical substances 35 Product Type Portable Computer TEC (kilowatt hour) Category D Category A Category B Category C 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. 3. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Category D Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB283802012

:

1. 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128 . CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 37 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 39

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

:

40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 This product and its electronics components must not be discarded with your household waste. Although the product components were manufactured in accordance with world standards restricting harmful substances, the product may contain, even in minute quantities, substances impacting the environment. At the end of the useful life of this product, you should return the product to HP. Failure to follow this guidance will subject the violator to the penalties provided by law. When a battery used in the HP product has reached the end of its useful life, you should return the battery either to HP or to the company commissioned by HP for technical support. Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/

reciclar 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) NOTE: This section applies only to products bearing the ENERGY STAR logo. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR-qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-

qualified computers. The ENERGY STAR Computers Program was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way products achieve this energy efficiency is by reducing power consumption when not being used through the Microsoft Windows Power Management feature. The Power Management feature enables the computer to enter a low-power (or sleep) mode after a period of inactivity. When used with an external monitor that is ENERGY STAR-qualified, this feature also supports the similar power management features of the external monitor. To take advantage of this energy savings, the Power Management feature has been preset to power down the computer and monitor within the following specified periods of inactivity:

Computer Within 30 minutes Monitor/Integrated Display Within 15 minutes Both the computer and monitor can be woken from sleep mode through user interaction with any of the computer input devices (mouse, keyboard, and so on). When configured with Wake On LAN

(WOL) enabled, the computer can also be woken by a network signal. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site for more information about the energy and financial savings potential of the Power Management Feature: http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site for more information about the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits: http://www.energystar.gov. CAUTION: Using the Energy Save Monitor feature with monitors that are not ENERGY STAR-

qualified can cause video distortion when an Energy Save timeout occurs. NOTE: ENERGY STAR is not supported on desktop computers, integrated desktop computers, small-scale servers and workstations configured with some versions of Linux or FreeDOS. If it is necessary to restore the operating system, you must also reset the ENERGY STAR settings (if applicable) after the restore. For Windows 7, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, select Start > Control Panel, and then type Power Options in the search window. For Windows 8, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, from the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options from the list of applications. ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) 43 Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers (CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A Category B Category C Category D TEC (kilowatt hour) Grade 1 98.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa Grade 2 148.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 234.0+Efa Grade 3 198.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Product Type Portable Computer TEC (kilowatt hour) Category A Category B Category C 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. 3. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Category D Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB283802012

:

1.

() 1 2 3 China PC energy label 45

() A B C D A B C 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128 . CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 46 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)

I/O PCAs

O: SJ/T11363-2006

X: SJ/T11363-2006

XRoHS 20031272002/95/EC

China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 47 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Table 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 49 NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS))

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations TCO Certified Edge Certification This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Index A airline travel notice 9 altitude notice 26, 32 B battery notice 9, 24, 41 battery recycling 34 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 26 Canada modem statement 13 Canada notices 4 China environmental notices 35 China PC energy label 35, 44 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 38, 47 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 3 disposal notices battery 41 battery, user replacement 9 equipment 34 factory sealed battery 9 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 34 ENERGY STAR compliance 9 environmental notices 34 equipment disposal notice 34 ergonomics notice 5, 21 European Union notices 4, 20 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 18 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 18 52 Index desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 18 notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 2 G GS Notice 5, 21 H headset and earphone volume level notice 25 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 49 J Japan material content declaration 41 Japan modem statement 13 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 14 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 49 K keyboard notice 25 L laser safety notice 10 M Macrovision Corporation notice 14 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 41 Mexico wireless notice 7 modem notices 10 modem statements Canada 13 Japan 13 New Zealand 13 U.S. 11 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 18 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 13 notices airline travel 9 battery 9, 41 battery, user replacement 24 Brazil 4 Canada 4 China restriction of hazardous substances 38, 47 environmental 34 equipment disposal 34 ergonomics 5, 21 European Union 4, 20 headset and earphone volume level 25 India restriction of hazardous substances 41, 49 Japan 6 Japan power cord 14 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 49 keyboard 25 laser safety 10 Macrovision Corporation 14 Mexico 7 modem 10 perchlorate material 41 power cords 14, 25 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 8, 23 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 8 travel 25 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 18 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 14, 25 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 34 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 8, 23 TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 8 travel notice 25 tropical warning notice 26, 33 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 26 U U.S. modem statement 11 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 V voice support 14 volume level notice, headset and earphone 25 W wireless LAN devices 3, 19, 20 Index 53